Complete Product Catalog - Norman Equipment Co.

normanequipment.com

Complete Product Catalog - Norman Equipment Co.

GK-1

CATALOG-HANDBOOK

TENTH EDITION

Stocked &

Distributed by

NORMAN

EQUIPMENT

COMPANY

800-323-2710

-COMPLIANT

MACHINE GUARDING

SAFETY PRODUCTS

• Programmable Safety Controller

• Safe Speed Monitors

• Safety Interlock Switches

• Non-Contact Safety Sensors

• Emergency Cable-Pull Switches

• Safety Controllers

• Safety Light Curtains

• Electronic Safety Sensors

• Serial Diagnostic Gateways

• Hinged Safety Interlocks

• Safety Edges/Bumpers

• Safety-Rated Limit Switches

• Safety Foot Switches

• Safety Pressure Mats

Turning Workplaces Into Safe Places ®


Safer

by

Design

Stocked & Distributed by NORMAN EQUIPMENT COMPANY

800-323-2710


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Topic

Page

Alphanumeric Product Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

About Schmersal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Man-Machine Safeguarding Products Selection Guides

Section 1

Keyed Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Section 2

Keyed Interlock Switches with Solenoid Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Section 3

Application Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Section 4

Emergency Cable-Pull Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Section 5

Non-Contact Safety Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

AES Series Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Section 6

Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Section 7

Hinged Safety Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Safety Rated Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Section 8

Safety Light Curtains & Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Section 9

Safety Category 3 Pressure Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Fail-To-Safe Safety Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Section 10

Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Safety PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Safe Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Appendices

Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Selected Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Copyright © 2011 by SCHMERSAL All Rights Reserved.

SCHMERSAL is continuously working to improve our product designs. Therefore we reserve the right to change product specifications/ratings

and other information contained in this catalog without notice. Proper installation and use of our products remains the customer’s responsibility.

Stocked & Distributed by NORMAN EQUIPMENT COMPANY

800-323-2710

i


ALPHANUMERIC PRODUCT INDEX

Product

Series

Page

Product

Series

Page

AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

AZ15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

AZ16zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

AZ17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

AZ17zi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

AZ200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 166

AZ3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

AZM170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

AZM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 172

AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

AZR31S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

AZS2305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

B25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

BNS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

BNS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

BNS33S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

BNS36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

BNS250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

BNS260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

BNS30 & BNS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

BNS303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

BNS333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

BNS-B20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

BZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

C50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

CSS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 198

CSS30S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 194

CSS 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 188

CSS 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 182

ES95 SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

FWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370–380

MZM100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 178

PDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Protect PSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

S900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

SDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

SHGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

SEPK(G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

SLC, SLG & SLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

SMS4, SMS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

SRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

SSW301HV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

ST14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

STS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

T.C 235/236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

TESF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

TESZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

TFA/TFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

TFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

TG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

TKF/TKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

TVS335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

TZF/TZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

TZG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

TZKF/TZKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Z332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Z/T235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Z/T236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Z/T335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Z/T336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

ZQ700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

ZQ900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

ZS71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

ZS75S (Bidirectional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

ZS80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

ZSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

ii

Stocked & Distributed by NORMAN EQUIPMENT COMPANY

800-323-2710


ABOUT SCHMERSAL

K.A. SCHMERSAL GmbH & Co. was founded as a family

business in 1945. The firm initially focused on the design

and manufacture of electromechanical switches for

industrial applications.

Our first products included heavy-duty, cast-encapsulated

limit switches for (post-war) civil engineering and construction

applications. This program quickly expanded to

include:

• grey cast iron limit switches

• light metal limit switches

• robust precision limit switches

• spindle limit switches

• gear motor switches

• elevator switch gears

• CENELEC position switches

• miniature snap-acting switches, and

• command devices for machine and crane control

systems.

With this early post-war product program, the firm quickly

established itself as a specialist in monitoring, switching,

and controlling elevators, material handling systems,

machine tools, and other industrial equipment.

Many of these initial products satisfied unique requirements

for safety switches. Such products included:

• explosion-proof switches for gasoline pumps

• door contacts and locks for personnel/freight

elevators

• cable monitoring switches for mountain cablecar

systems, and

• snap-acting limit switches featuring positive-opening

contacts for lignite diggers, construction cranes, and

other machinery.

Today the Schmersal Group has grown to include 5

manufacturing facilities around the world, producing over

20,000 different switching and control devices – making

Schmersal one of the largest machine safety suppliers.

The Schmersal product family has developed to include

the latest designs in Electro-Mechanical Interlocks,

Electronic Safety Sensors, Programmable Safety

Controllers, and Optoelectronic Safety devices.

Headquartered in Wuppertal, Germany, the Schmersal

Group of companies has direct operations in 17 countries

employing over 1200 people around the world. A

global reach, combined with our focus on Man-Machine

Safety, enables Schmersal to remain committed to

customer’s safety application requirements.

This customer driven approach has given Schmersal the

ability to continually develop products to meet the latest

application needs and market trends around the world.

SYSTEM SAFETY: PROTECTION

FOR MAN AND MACHINE

Safety requirements for workers in almost all industries

have evolved to insure that safety in the workplace is

no longer an option. Government organizations around

the world have made worker safety a priority for companies

which has drawn even greater attention to the topic

of safety. The latest product developments from the

Schmersal Group have focused on advanced safety

systems designed to satisfy the most current safety

standards and regulations.

GLOBAL COVERAGE:

Technical support and

inventory in more than

22 countries.

iii


MAN-MACHINE SAFETY

THE SCHMERSAL SYSTEM:

A 360° APPROACH

For over 60 years the SCHMERSAL group of companies

has been dedicated to understanding machine safety. We

have made it our mission to continuously develop safety

controls utilizing the latest technologies to keep

pace with the evolution in the world of

machinery safety. This safety controls catalog

is a compilation of information that

addresses the latest and most stringent

safety standards from around

the world aimed to meet a multitude

of industry applications.

The day-to-day study of modern

workplace safety is filled with

the minutiae of industry regulations

and standards. But philosophically

we look to a higher

standard in the work of one of

the world’s greatest engineers,

Leonardo da Vinci. A true Renaissance

genius, he was a man

whose fascination for the human body

and the principles of physics resulted in

his meticulous anatomical drawings, numerous

intricate machines, and even a robotic knight

that consisted of a system of cables and pulleys that controlled

the movement of articulated limbs. Arguably the

world’s first ergonomic engineer, Leonardo truly understood

man and his physiological relationship to machinery.

Like Leonardo, we at SCHMERSAL take a 360-

degree approach to safety. We evaluate from

every angle the potential for accidents

and their prevention. We recognize the

wide differences in each work

station. We take into account

specific guard design, as well as

the environmental and physical

considerations necessary to support

machinery operation and

provide maintenance. We even

understand the frustrations and

all-too-human temptation some

machine operators feel to override

(bypass) the safety system.

As a world-wide leader in the manufacturing

and supply of reliable and flexible

safety solutions, we are well aware that

different markets are subject to different

regulations. Great consideration is given so

that our products are designed to comply with

safety standards around the globe.

iv

International

symbol for

Positive-Break

contacts

CHANGING MAN-MACHINE

SAFEGUARDING RULES

In today’s industrial world, worker safety has become a

priority with manufacturers from all industries as well as

government’s around the world. In North America there

are several government organizations with formal

safety guidelines such as OSHA, ANSI,

MOL and CSA. In addition to the North

American regulations there are

developing European and international

safety standards which

have been adopted in the USA

and Canada.

Specific industry standards

and guidelines developed to

achieve a greater level of

safety can be found at

www.schmersalusa.com or by

ordering our MAN-MACHINE

SAFERGUARDING REQUIRE-

MENTS & TECHNIQUES handbook.

There you will find information

you need to help determine

what level of safety you may require to

comply with today’s safety standards.

NEW SAFETY CONCEPTS

AND TECHNIQUES

The common goal of the latest safety standards

and regulations is to provide a heightened

level of protection to machine operators,

maintenance personnel and any other

person who may come in contact

with a machine. In order to reach

this goal there have been several

new safety concepts developed

to help minimize the risk of

injury as well as integrate the

safety components into the

machine automation controls.

These concepts include:

Connectivity

• Safety System Performance

Component Reliability

• Safety System Structure

Due to the potential complexity of machine

safety, these latest concepts are considered

when designing a safety system to help simplify

the process. In addition other “classic”

safety concepts are utilized such as positive


eak, tamper resistant and fault detection to help construct

a safety system which suits an application best.

“SAFETY-SPECIFIC” COMPONENTS

New switches, sensors and controls have been designed

specifically for safety applications. Each is intended to

overcome one or more of the limitations of conventional

“non-safety” components…and to satisfy one or more of

the current safety requirements inherent in the latest

industry standards and guidelines.

These safety-specific components are the subject of this

catalog. They include:

• programmable safety controller

• electronic safety sensors

• safe speed monitors

• serial diagnostic gateways

• keyed interlock switches

• keyed interlock switches with solenoid latching

• sealed non-contact safety sensors

• safety foot switches

• push/pull operated emergency cable-pull switches

• two-hand controls

• positive-break hinged safety switches

• safety light curtains/beams

• fail-to-safe safety edges

• safety pressure mats

• safety-rated limit switches

• safety controllers

Each of these components is designed to help the safety

specialist and equipment designers to better address

their responsibility…to ensure that machinery, built or

purchased, does not expose the operators, helpers or

maintenance personnel to hazards.

GUIDE TO APPLICATION SYMBOLS USED

THROUGHOUT THE CATALOG

Sliding Guard Applications

Hinged Guard Applications

SATISFYING YOUR NEEDS

We trust that this Catalog-Handbook, its companion catalogs,

and our tutorial Manual and videos, will be useful

tools in the selection of suitable components to satisfy

your unique application requirements.Your needs are our

most important concern.

Lift-off Guard Applications

v


Optional M12

quick-connect

termination

Up to 3 contacts,

for dual-channel

reliability with

signalling

AZ16

Anatomy of the world’s

best-selling interlock switch

normally-closed

contacts (ensure circuit interruption)

Self-lifting terminal clamps (for

speedy installation)

3 threaded

knock-out

conduit entry

points for easy

installation

Electricallyinsulated

contacts

for added safety (no

potential for crossover)

Molded-in, easy-to-read terminal

markings (help ensure proper wiring)

IP67 sealed housing

(tolerant to hostile environments)

Difficult-to-defeat

multiple-cam

actuating mechanism

(mechanical life: 10 million)

Integral, non-removable

actuating head resists bypassing

by preventing access to operating

plunger

Internationally accepted

(CE, UL, CSA, BG, SUVA,

SA, NEMKO, TUV, and

others)

High-strength, corrosion-resistant

polymeric housing (no ground

connector required)

7 lbs. of built-in key holding

force resists guard opening

due to shock or vibration

(other holding force

options)

4 actuator-key

entry points,

for ease of

mounting

And the industry's broadest

range of optional features &

accessories…

• Adjustable ball latch

• Magnetic door latch

• Flex-mounted actuator keys

• Individually-coded actuator keys

• Solenoid-locking (Model AZM161)

• Gold contacts

• Signal lamps (Pilot light or built-in LED)

• Explosion-proof models (ATEX-compliant)

• Key entry closure caps

• Optional funnel entry

• Optional M12 connector

vi

Rugged, tamperresistant,

stainless

steel coded actuator

key (Individuallycoded

keys available)

Optional “maintained” or

“ejecting” actuator key

(for application

versatility)


KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES

1

Switch

Series

SELECTION GUIDE

Housing

Material

Envelope

Dimensions

Contact

Configurations

Catalog

Page

ST14

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

3

⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2"

1 NO & 1 NC

2 NC

2

AZ17

AZ17zi

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2"

1 NO & 1 NC

2 NC

4

8

AZ15/16

AZ16zi

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 1 ⁄4" × 2" × 3"

1 NC

1 NO & 1 NC

2 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

3 NC

12

18

AZ200

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2" 22

1 Diagnostic Output

TZG

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 3 3 ⁄4"

1 NO & 1 NC

2 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

SDG Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 6" 2 NO & 1 NC

28

3 NC

1 NO & 1 NC

AZ3350 Die-cast aluminum 1 1 ⁄2" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4 1 ⁄2"

2 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

32

3 NC

SHGV

(Key Transfer)

Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4" × 4" 1 NO & 1 NC 36

AZ415 Die-cast aluminum 1 3 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 4" 2 NO & 2 NC 38

24

1


SERIES AZ17

Compact Tamper-Resistant Movable

Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space

is limited.

• Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) … facilitates

fast, easy installation.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• Eight optional key entry locations … depending upon

mounting arrangement.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of

safety circuit upon actuator key removal.

• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerant to

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre

reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile

environments.

• “Padlockable” key for added security during

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Several styles of actuator key … accommodates a wide

variety of movable guards.

Description

The compact Series AZ17 is designed for use with movable

machine guards/access gates which must be closed for

operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And

their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple

tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67

rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in

hostile environments.

Operation

The AZ17 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists

of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard. Upon

opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are forced to open

through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with the

actuating key. These positive-break NC contacts assure circuit

interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the

actuator key. (The NO contact closes upon key removal.)

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC

contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open.

Note: Available with optional M12x1 quick-connect.

SPACE-SAVING

IDC CONTACTS

& CONNECTOR

Typical Applications

The AZ17 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on

movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access

doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable

guards.

4

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


AZ17 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Actuator key must be ordered separately)

Part Number Contacts Connection

AZ17-11ZK

AZ17-11ZRK

1 NO & 1 NC

AZ17-02ZK

AZ17-02ZRK

2 NC

IDC Connection

AZ17-11ZK-ST

AZ17-11ZRK-ST

1 NO & 1 NC

AZ17-02ZK-ST

AZ17-02ZRK-ST

2 NC

M12x1 Quick Connect

Solenoid-latching models available. (Model AZM170) See page 44

Individually-coded key models available (Model AZ17zi)

(For extra security in “high-risk” applications) See page 8.

Notes: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. Add

suffix “2243” for front of unit cable entry or suffix “2243-1” for

rear cable entry.

“ST” models use M12, 4 pin connections. Order connection

cable A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-1-X-A-1, or please see page 94

for connector cable descriptions.

ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

AZ17/170-B1

AZ17/170-B5

AZ17-B6

AZ17/170-B11

AZ17/170-B15

AZ17/170-B1-2245

AZ17-B25-L-G1

AZ17-B25-L-G2

AZ17-B25-R-G1

AZ17-B25-R-G2

MS AZ 17-P

MS AZ 17-R/P

Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius)

Right-angle key

(7.87" minimum closing radius)

Flexible, close-radius key

(1.97" minimum closing radius)

Elongated standard straight key

(7.87" minimum closing radius)

Elongated right-angle key

(7.87" minimum closing radius)

Standard straight key with vibration-resistant

mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius)

B25 door handle actuator with star grip for

left hand hinged guard

B25 door handle actuator with T grip for

left hand hinged guard

B25 door handle actuator with star grip for

right hand hinged guard

B25 door handle actuator with T grip for

right hand hinged guard

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting.

AZ17-B6 key required. See page 6.

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or

perpendicular mounting. AZ17-B6 key

required of units with B6 keys.

1

SELECTED ACTUATOR KEYS (See page 7 for more details)

AZ17/170-B1

AZ17/170-B5

AZ17-B6

B25 DOOR HANDLE ACTUATORS

DIMENSIONS

Note: For detailed information on the B25 Door Handle Actuator, see page 82.

5


AZ17 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced,

self-extinguishing thermoplastic

Actuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301

Degree of Protection IP67

Holding Force

zk models: 1.2 pounds

zrk models: 7 pounds

Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)

Closing Force

Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)

Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F

Mechanical Life

> 10 6 operations

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE

EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15

EN ISO 13849-1 UL

EN 954-1

CSA

Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with AZ17-B6 actuator key)

7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15

actuator key)

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Fine silver

Contact Configuration Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact bridges

Contact Rating

4A/230VAC

2.5A/230VA (with “ST” quick-connect)

Switching Action

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

Short Circuit Protection 6A (time-delay)

Rated Isolation Voltage 250V

Type Terminals

Insulation displacement contacts &

connector for 18AWG flexible

stranded wire (0.75 mm 2 )

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

AZ17-11z

AZ17-02z

13

21

14

22

11

21

12

22

0

4,2

7,6

8

11

13-14

21-22

0

4,2

8

8

11

11

11-12

21-22

MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT

MS AZ17-P

AZ17-B6 key only

MS AZ17-R/P

AZ17-B6 key only

6


AZ17 TECHNICAL DATA

DIMENSIONS

24

.94

Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models)

1

23

.91

ø 4,2

.17

31

1.22

22

.87

8,2

.32

22

.87

60

2.36

BLACK

BLACK

BLUE

BROWN

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK

BLACK

ø19

.75

AZ17-02z

Connections

AZ17-11z

Pg M169

5

.2

8

.31

20

.79

AZ17-02z

AZ17-11z

same polarity; type four enclosure

22

.87

30

1.18

ø 4-8

.16-.31

30

1.18

mm

inch

0.670"

(17)

(Remove outer sleeve

from cable)

ACTUATOR KEYS

AZ17/170-B1

AZ17/170-B5

AZ17/170-B11

30

1.18 22

30

1.18

22

30

1.18 22

5,5

.27

.87

20

.79

4,3

.17

7,5

.30

.87

20

.79

4,3

.17

12

.47

.87

20

.79

33

1.30

10

.40

23

.91

2

.08

AZ17/170-B15

30

16

1.18

.63

25

.98

8

.31

36

1.41

13

.51

23

.91

2

.08

23

.91

2

.08

30

1.18

22

.87

20

.79

AZ17-B6

4,2

.18

48

1.89

24

.94

12

.47

23

.91

2

.08

11

.43

6

.24

12

.47

4,3

.17

7

.28

8

.31

60,5

2.38

33

1.30

37,5

1.48

4,3

.17

AZ17/170-B1-2245

8

.31

ø11

.43

ø4,2

.17

18

.71

b

a

13

.51

36

1.42

a

b

30

1.18

20

.79

22

.87

30

1.18

28

1.10

23

.91

23

.91

7


SERIES AZ17zi

INDIVIDUALLY-CODED

ACTUATOR KEYS

Individually-Coded Movable

Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult

to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces

liability exposure.

• Individually-coded actuator key … provides extra security

in high-risk applications.

Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space

is limited.

• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.

• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation

flexibility.

• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit

interruption upon actuator key removal.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the

most hostile environments.

• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

Description

The compact Series AZ17zi are designed for use with

movable machine guards which must be closed for operator

safety. Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC

contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than

conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can

weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for

interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.

Operation

The AZ17zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock

switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an

individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The

key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.

Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)

contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break

NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine

stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO

contacts close upon key removal.)

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC

contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The

tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,

bent wires or other readily available means.

SPACE-SAVING

IDC CONTACTS

& CONNECTOR

Typical Applications

The AZ17zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on

movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged

covers, access panels and other movable guards.

8

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


AZ17zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE MODELS

(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key)

Part Number Actuator Key Type Contacts

Units with 1.2 lbs key retention force:

AZ17-11Zi-B1 Straight key

AZ17-11Zi-B5 Right Angle key

AZ17-11Zi-B6R Flexible mounting – right

1 NO & 1 NC

AZ17-11Zi-B6L Flexible mounting – left

AZ17-02Zi-B1 Straight key

AZ17-02Zi-B5 Right Angle key

AZ17-02Zi-B6R Flexible mounting – right

2 NC

AZ17-02Zi-B6L Flexible mounting – left

Units with 7 lbs key retention force:

AZ17-11ZRi-B1 Straight key

AZ17-11ZRi-B5 Right Angle key

AZ17-11ZRi-B6R Flexible mounting – right

1 NO & 1 NC

AZ17-11ZRi-B6L Flexible mounting – left

AZ17-02ZRi-B1 Straight key

AZ17-02ZRi-B5 Right Angle key

AZ17-02ZRi-B6R Flexible mounting – right

2 NC

AZ17-02ZRi-B6L Flexible mounting – left

Note: Models also available with M12x1 Quick connect, add "-ST" to

part number before key type (AZ17-02Zi-ST-B1)

Part Number

MS AZ 17-P

MS AZ 17-R/P

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Mounting kits require use of the -B6 key

Description

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel

mounting of units with B6 keys.

(See installation on Page 10)

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or

perpendicular mounting of units with

B6 keys. (See installation on Page 10)

1

IDC CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS

9


AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing

thermoplastic

Actuator Key Stainless steel, 1.4301

Degree of Protection IP67

Key Retention Force zi models: 1.2 pounds

zir models: 7 pounds

Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)

Closing Force

Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)

Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F

Mechanical Life

> 10 6 operations

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 EN 954-1

EN 60947-5-1 CE

EN ISO 13849-1 UL

BG-GS-ET-15 CSA

Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with B6L or B6R actuator key)

7.87" (with B1 or B5 actuator key)

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Isolation Voltage

Type Terminals

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

4A/230VAC

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

6A (time-delay)

250V

Insulation displacement contacts

& connector for 18AWG flexible

stranded wire (0.75 mm 2 )

Note: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. See

optional accessories.

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

AZ17-11zi

13

21

14

22

0

4,2

7,6

8

11

13-14

21-22

AZ17-02zi

11

21

12

22

0

4,2

8

8

11

11

11-12

21-22

MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT

(Eases installation and facilitates

adjustments due to guard misalignment)

MS AZ17-P

(for parallel

mounting)

MS AZ17-R/P

(for parallel or

perpendicular mounting)

10


AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATA

DIMENSIONS

B1 Actuator Key

0.177"

(4.5)

R min. 7.87" (200)

0.59"

(15) 0.314"

(8)

R min. 5.51" (140)

0.393"

(10)

1.18"(30)

0.866"(22)

0.787"(20)

0.078"

(2)

1.30" (33)

0.216"

(5.5)

0.169"

(4.3)

0.905"

(23)

B5 Actuator Key

0.177"

(4.5)

0.59"

(15)

R min. 7.87" (200)

0.314"

(8)

R min. 5.51" (140)

1.42" (36)

0.511

(13)

0.216"

(5.5)

1.18"(30)

0.866"(22)

0.787"(20)

0.169"

(4.3)

0.472"

(12)

22

.87

0.905"

(23)

0.078"

(2)

0.314"

(8)

0.787"(20)

0.866"(22)

1.18"(30)

0.169"

(4.3)

Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models)

B6L Actuator Key

B6R Actuator Key

1.18" (30)

0.866"(22)

0.944"(21)

0.472" (12)

0.165"

(4.2)

8

5

1

24

.94

23

.91

ø 4,2

.17

8,2

.32

Pg M169

.31

60

2.36

31

1.22

22

.87

22

.89

.20

ø19

.75

20

.79

30

1.18

ø 4-8

.16-.31

30

1.18

mm

inch

0.787"(20)

RED

WHT

GRN

BLK

GRN

WHT

RED

BLK

0.314"

(8)

0.433"

(11)

0.157"

(4)

0.944" (24)

0.236"

(6)

AZ17-02zi

Connections

AZ17-11zi

0.078"

(2)

0.905"

(23)

0.433"

(11)

R min. 1.97" (50)

0.590"

(15)

R min. 1.97" (50)

0.590"

(15)

R min. 1.97" (50)

0.314"

(8)

R min. 1.97" (50)

AZ17-02zi

AZ17-11zi

0.314"(8)

same polarity; type four enclosure

(Minimum radius: 50mm)

0.670"

(17)

(Remove outer sleeve

from cable)

All dimensions in

inches (mm)

11


SERIES AZ15/16

Description

The Series AZ15/16 is designed for use with movable

machine guards/access gates which must be closed for

operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And

their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple

tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67

rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in

hostile environments.

Tamper-Resistant Movable

Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult

to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces

liability exposure.

• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.

• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation

flexibility.

• Individually-coded actuator key option … provides extra

security in high-risk applications. See AZ16zi on page 18.

• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit

interruption upon actuator key removal.

• High key-retention force (7 pounds) … eliminates

inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the

most hostile environments.

• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Explosion-proof model and M12x1 quick-connect (“ST”)

available (Please consult factory).

Optional Safety

Controller.

See Page 320.

Operation

The AZ15/16 electromechanical safety interlock switch

consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable

guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are

forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical

linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC

contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)

upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes

upon key removal.)

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC

contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open.

Typical Applications

The AZ15/16 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access

doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable

guards.

12

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


AZ15/16 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter**

Actuator Key Sold Separately)

Part Number

AZ15ZVK (key spring returned)

AZ15ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)*

AZ16ZVK (key spring returned)

Contacts (with

actuator key inserted)

1 NC

1 NC

1 NO & 1 NC

AZ16ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 1 NO & 1 NC

AZ16-02ZVK (key spring returned)

2 NC

AZ16-02ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 2 NC

AZ16-12ZVK (key spring returned)

1 NO & 2 NC

AZ16-12ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 1 NO & 2 NC

AZ16-03ZVK (key spring returned)

3 NC

AZ16-03ZVRK (key maintained upon insertion)* 3 NC

*Feature 7 pound key retention force. For lighter key retention force

(1-2 pounds) add suffix "2254".

**To order unit with cordgrip instead of 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter, add suffix

"CG" to part number...eg. AZ15-zvk-CG.

Add suffix -1637 to basic part number for Gold contacts

Add suffix “-ST” to part number for M12x1, 4 pin quick-connect and

order connection cable A-K4P-M12-S-G-5M-1-X-A-1, or see page 94

for connector cable descriptions.

Part Number

AZ15/16-B1

AZ15/16-B2

AZ15/16-B3

AZ15/16-B6

AZ15/16-B1-2177

AZ15/16-B6-2177

AZ15/16-B1-KRH

AZ15/16-B1-2024

AZ15/16-B1-1747

AZ15/16-B2-1747

AZ15/16-B3-1747

AZ15/16-B1-2053

ACTUATOR KEYS

Description

Standard Key (5.9" minimum closing radius)

Small radius actuating key (1.8" minimum

closing radius)

Small radius actuating key (1.3" minimum

closing radius)

Flexible-movement actuating key

Funnel entry adapter with elongated

straight actuating key

Funnel entry adapter with elongated

flexible-movement actuating key

Key Removal Hand-Grip Assembly with Key

Retention Chain (for use with AZ15...zvrk

and AZ16...zvrk)

Actuator key with gasketed key caps

Actuator key with door holding magnet kit

(7 pound holding force)

(for use with AZ16…zvr-2254 models)

Actuator key with ball latch kit

(Adjustable holding force up to 22 pounds)

(For use with AZ16...zvrk)

1

ACCESSORIES

for AZ15/16 Keyed-Interlock Switches

AZ16-STS30-01

AZ16-STS30-02

Part Number

Description

AZ15/16-1476 Key entry closure caps (for unused entry slots)

M20-CG

Cord grip (cable gland)

M20- 1 ⁄2"NPT-P Plastic 1 /2" NPT adapter

M20- 1 ⁄2" Metal 1 /2" NPT adapter

PL-M20-24V 24VAC/DC pilot light kit

AZ16-STS30-03

AZ16-STS30-04

AZ16-STS30-05

AZ16-STS30-06

AZ16-STS30-07

AZ16-STS30-08

STS Door Handle kits for use with AZ16

switches. (See page 77 for details.)

PL-M20-120V

120VAC/DC pilot light kit

SZ16/335

Actuator Key Lockout Device

(Accepts up to 6 padlocks)

AZ15/16-AP Alignment Pins (Set of 2)

MS AZ 15/16-P

MS AZ 15/16-R/P

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting

(See illustration Page 16)

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel and

perpendicular mounting

(See illustration Page 16)

MS mounting kits require the use of the -B6 key

ST PIN CONNECTIONS

Actuator Key Removal Handle

AZ15/16-B1-KRH

Lockout Device SZ16/335

(padlock not included)

AZ15/16-2053 with ball catch

Holding force up to

22 pounds

AZ15/16-1747

with holding magnet

Holding force 7 pounds

13


AZ15/16 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing

thermoplastic

Actuator Key

Stainless steel (defeat-resistant

design)

Degree of Protection IP67

Travel for Positive-Break 8 mm (0.315 inches)

Key Ejection Force "-zv" models: 3N ( 0.7 pounds)

Key Retention Force "-zvr-2254 models: 5N (1.2 pounds)

"-zvr" models: 30N (7 pounds)

Closing Force

Approx. 15N (3.4 pounds)

Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F

Mechanical Life

> 1 million operations

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15

EN 60947-5-1 UL

EN ISO 13849-1 CSA

EN 954-1

TUV

CE

Minimum Closing Radius 1.3" (with B3 actuator key)

1.8" (with B2 actuator key)

5.9" (with B1 actuator key)

DIMENSIONS

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Isolation Voltage

Rated Impulse Withstand

Voltage

Type Terminals*

* Units available with M12x1 quick-connect.

(Please consult factory).

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

2×2mm (minimum)

4A/230VAC (A600)

2.5A/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)

Slow-action, positive-break

NC contacts

Fuse 6A (time-delay)

500VAC

6kV

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible

stranded wire (2.5mm 2 )

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

13

21

14

22

AZ16z

0

2,3 5,2

5,5

8

13-14

21-22

“Make before

break”

AZ16-02z

11

21

12

22

0

2,3

5,5

5,5

8

8

11-12

21-22

AZ16-12z

13

21

31

14

22

32

0 2,3 5,2

5,5 8

13-14

21-22

31-32

11

21

31

12

22

32

AZ16-03z

0 2,3

5,5 8

5,5 8

11-12

21-22

31-32

AZ15/16-2053 Ball Latch Kit

AZ15/16-2024 Gasketed Key Caps

14


AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS

AZ15/16-B1 Actuator Key

AZ15/16-B1 Actuator Key

with AZ15/16-1747

Holding Magnet Kit

1

Minimum

actuating radius

with actuator B1/B1-1747

5

1

AZ15/16-B1-2177 Actuator Key

40

1.58

ø5,5

.22

5

.2

34,3

1.37

2

0.08

11

.43

56

2.24

16

.64

Minimum

actuating radius

with actuator

B1/B1-1747

23,3

0.93

27

1.08

Actuator B1 is standard for AZ15/16; it allows a

minimum actuating radius of 150 mm. Please note

that the center of rotation must be in the same

plane as the upper edge of the safety switch.

4

Ordering example:

Switch, holding magnet and

actuator: AZ16-zv/B1-1747

AZ15/16-B2 Actuator Key

AZ15/16-B2 Actuator Key

with AZ15/16-1747

Holding Magnet Kit

mm

inch

Minimum

actuating

radius with

actuator

B2/B2-1747

Actuator B2 is particularly suitable for small

actuating radii over the wide edge of the

actuator (R=45 to 150mm). The basic setting

(angle 15°) provides a minimum radius of

45mm=1.8 in. For larger radii, the angle has

to be adjusted correspondingly by turning the

set screw counter-clockwise.

AZ15/16-B3 Actuator Key

AZ15/16-B3 Actuator Key

with AZ15/16-1747

Holding Magnet Kit

Minimum actuating

radius with actuator

B3/B3-1747

Actuator B3 is particularly suitable

for small actuating radii over the narrow

edge of the actuator (R=32 to

150mm). The basic setting (angle

10°) provides a minimum radius of

32mm=1.3in. For larger radii, the

angle has to be adjusted correspondingly

by turning the set screw

clockwise.

15


AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS

AZ15/16-B1-2177 Funnel Entry Adapter

(with straight actuating key)

AZ15/16-B6 Flex Actuator Key

a

56

2.24

ø5,5

.22

56

2.2 40

1.6

7

0.28

16

0.63

11

.43

10

.4

16

.64

40

1.58

ø5,5

.22

5

.2

b

34,3

1.37

11

.43

16

.64

2

0.08

75° 79°

23,3

0.93

27

1.08

27

1.08

27,3

1.09

16

64

10,9

.44

6

.24

52

208

31,4

1.26

28

1.12

MS AZ 15/16 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT

(Eases installation and facilitates

adjustments due to guard misalignment)

8

.32

14

.56

MS AZ 15/16-R/P

(for parallel or

perpendicular mounting)

MS AZ 15/16-P

(for parallel mounting)

16


1

Safer

by

Design

17


SERIES AZ16zi

Description

The Series AZ16zi are designed for use with movable

machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.

Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC

contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than

conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can

weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for

interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.

Operation

The AZ16zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock

switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an

individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The

key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.

Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)

contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break

NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine

stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO

contacts close upon key removal.)

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC

contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The

tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,

bent wires or other readily available means.

Individually-Coded Movable

Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult

to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces

liability exposure.

• Individually-coded actuator key … provides extra security

in high-risk applications.

• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.

• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation

flexibility.

• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit

interruption upon actuator key removal.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the

most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant key mounting screws … deter

bypassing.

• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

Patented geometrically-unique tumbler

configuration

Typical Applications

The AZ16zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on

movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged

covers, access panels and other movable guards.

18

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


AZ16zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE MODELS

(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key and

1

⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter)

Part Number

AZ16-12zi-B1

AZ16-03zi-B1

AZ16-12zi-B1-1747

AZ16-03zi-B1-1747

AZ16-12zi-B1-2024

AZ16-03zi-B1-2024

AZ16-12zi-B1-2053

AZ16-03zi-B1-2053

AZ16-12zi-B1-2177

AZ16-03zi-B1-2177

Description

Contacts (with

actuator key inserted)

1 NO & 2 NC

Standard unit

3 NC

Standard unit with

built-in key actuator

1 NO & 2 NC

magnet latch

3 NC

Standard unit with

built-in slot rubber

1 NO & 2 NC

seals on key actuator 3 NC

Standard unit with

built-in ball-latched

1 NO & 2 NC

key actuator

3 NC

Standard unit with

funnel entry adaptor

1 NO & 2 NC

3 NC

Part Number

M20-CG

M20- 1 ⁄2"P

M20- 1 ⁄2"M

AZ15/16-1476

SZ16/335

PL-M20-24V

PL-M20-120V

AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES

Description

Cord grip (cable gland)

Spare Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter

(One supplied with each unit)

Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter (optional)

Key entry closure caps

(for unused entry slots)

Lockout Device

(accepts up to 6 padlocks)

24VAC/DC LED Pilot Light Kit

110VAC/DC Pilot Light Kit

1

EXAMPLE OF INDIVIDUALLY-CODED KEYS

provide extra security in high-risk applications

19


AZ16zi TECHNICAL DATA

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing

plastic

Actuator Key

Stainless steel

Degree of Protection IP67

Travel for Positive-Break 0.315 inches (8 mm)

Key Ejection Force 3 N (0.7 pounds)

Insertion Force

Approx. 15N (3.3 pounds)

Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Conformity to Standards UL EN 954-1

CSA

BG-GS-ET-15

EN ISO 13849-1 CE

Key Withdrawal Speed 2 meters/second (maximum)

Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250mm)

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

13

21

31

14

22

32

AZ16-12zi

0

5,5

5,6

8

13-14

21-22

31-32

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Switching Action

Contact Rating

Rated Insulation Voltage

Thermal Current Rating

Current Rating

Rated Impulse

Withstand Voltage

Short Circuit Protection

Type Terminals

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically-separated contact

bridges

2 × 2 mm

Slow-action, positive-break

NC contacts

A600

500VAC

10A (300VAC)

6A @ 120VAC

4A @ 230VAC

2.5V/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)

6kV

Fuse 6A (slow-blow)

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 2.5 mm 2

(AWG13) wire

AZ16-03zi

11

21

31

12

22

32

0

5,5

5,5

8

8

11-12

21-22

31-32

“-2177” Funnel Entry Adapter

(Order as part of base switch…

e.g. AZ16-02Zi-B1-2177)

DIMENSIONS

5,5

.22

11

.43

10

.4

5

.2

40,7

1.63

mm

inch

23

.9

40

1.58

56

2.24

16

64

10,9

.44

52

208

31,4

1.26

28

1.12

14

.56

8

.32

6

.24

20


AZ16zi INDIVIDUALLY-CODED ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS

1

Applications: harsh environments

(coarse dirt, chips, flour…)

For holding light to medium-weight guards closed

21


SERIES AZ 200

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch and

actuator required for operation.

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—no

additional door handles are needed.

• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states

• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …

satisfy requirements of Safety PL e to EN ISO 13849-1,

Control Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note on next page.

• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be

left quickly and safely.

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door

opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding

actuator.

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices,

max 200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to

safety performance level.

Description

The AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock is

designed for use with movable machine guards/access gates

which must be closed for operator safety.

The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unit

with door handle and optional emergency exit handle. The

actuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting the

actuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizing

pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock can

have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages the

interlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which in

turns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echo

technology provides diagnostic information and detects and

indicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two different

actuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards.

The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 250 mA. It features one electronic diagnostic output that

can signal errors before the safety outputs are switched off,

thus enabling a controlled shutdown of the machine.

With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of

the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,

up to 31 AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic

output can be wired in series without detriment to the safety

performance level/control category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1/

Category 4 to EN 954-1).

Typical Applications

The AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access

panels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable for

both sliding guards and hinged guards.

22

AVAILABLE AZ200 MODELS

Part Number

Description

Screw Terminals

AZ200SK-T1P2P

Door detection sensor, diagnostic

output, 2 PNP safety outputs

AZ200SK-TSD2P

Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic

output*, 2 PNP safety outputs

M23 x1 quick connect, 8+1 pin

AZ200ST1-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic

output, 2 PNP safety outputs

AZ200ST1-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic

output*, 2 PNP safety outputs

M12x1 quick connect, 8 pin

AZ200ST2-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic

output, 2 PNP safety outputs

AZ200ST2-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic

output*, 2 PNP safety outputs

* Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with

various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.

ACTUATORS

Part Number

Description

AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left

AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left with inside emergency door

release

AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right

AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right with inside emergency door

release

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

with inside emergency door release

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

with inside emergency door release

Note: For appropriate connector cable for ST models, please

see page 94.

For ST1 models, order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...

For ST2 models, order cable staring with A-K8P-M12...


SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS

Part number: SZ200

Description:

Lockout tag,

up to 5 padlocks

1

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP

semiconductor outputs. See page 320 for

recommended SCHMERSAL safety control

modules.

*Note: A safety control module may be required

for reset function and/or feedback monitoring

functions, as well as increased output current

requirements.

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see

page 166 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.

23


SERIES TZG

Description

The Series TZG is designed for use with movable machine

guards/access gates which must be closed for operator

safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And

their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple

tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67

rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in

hostile environments.

Operation

The Series TZG electromechanical safety interlock switch

consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable

guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are

forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical

linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC

contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)

upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes

upon key removal.)

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC

contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.

Typical Applications

The Series TZG is intended for use as a safety interlock

switch on movable machine guards which, when open,

expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine

hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective

gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels

and other movable guards.

Movable Machine Guard

Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult

to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces

liability exposure.

• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator

head provides installation versatility.

• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit

interruption upon actuator key removal.

• High key retention force (5 pounds) … eliminates

inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the

most hostile environments.

• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter.

Actuator Keys Sold Separately)

Part Number Contacts Description*

TZG01.103

TZG01.110

1 NO & 1 NC

2 NC

Keyed interlock switch

with front* key entry and

slow action contacts.

*Field-rotatable actuator head for key entry from right, left or rear.

Part Number

TZ/CO

TZ/CW

TZ/COR

TZ/CK

TZ/CWR

TZ/COF/HIS.1

TZ/COF/HIS.2

OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS

Description

Standard straight actuator key

(13" minimum closing radius)

Right-angled straight actuator key

(11.8" minimum closing radius)

Radial entry actuator key

(11.8" minimum closing radius)

Short straight actuator key

(6.3" minimum closing radius)

Right-angled bent actuator key

(11.8" minimum closing radius)

Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)

(13.8" minimum closing radius)

Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)

(13.8" minimum closing radius)

TZ/CORF/HIS.1

TZ/CORF/HIS.2

Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)

(7.1" minimum closing radius)

Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)

(5.9" minimum closing radius)

24


TZG TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing

thermoplastic

Actuator Key

Galvanized steel

(defeat-resistant design)

Degree of Protection IP67

Holding Force

20N (4.8 pounds)

Travel for Positive-Break 12.5mm

Force to Reach

Approx. 20N (4.8 pounds)

Positive-Break

Closing Force

Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Mechanical Life

1 million operations (minimum)

Shock Resistance >30g / 18ms

Vibration Resistance >15g / 10…200Hz

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE

EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15

EN ISO 13849-1 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key

used. Please see actuator key

selection chart.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Insulation Voltage

Rated Impulse

Withstand Voltage

Type Terminals

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

2 × 3.5 mm

8A (250VAC)

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts (TZG models)

Snap-action, positive-break NC

contacts (TZGP models)

10A (slow-blow) – TZG models

6A (slow-blow) – TZGP models

250VAC

4kV

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13 AWG solid

wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG

stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire

1

DIMENSIONS

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS

Dimensional base for actuator

1NO/1NC

2NC

25


SERIES TZG ACTUATORS

ACTUATOR KEYS

TZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR

TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2

TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK

26


1

Safer

by

Design

27


SERIES SDG

Description

The Series SDG is designed for use with movable machine

guards/access gates which must be closed for operator

safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And

their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple

tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67

rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in

hostile environments.

Operation

The Series SDG electromechanical safety interlock switch

consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable

guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are

forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical

linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC

contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)

upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes

upon key removal.)

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC

contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.

Typical Applications

The Series SDG is intended for use as a safety interlock

switch on movable machine guards which, when open,

expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine

hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective

gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels

and other movable guards.

Movable Machine Guard

Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult

to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces

liability exposure.

• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator

head provides installation versatility.

• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit

interruption upon actuator key removal.

• Built-in retention force (1.2 pounds) … eliminates

inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical

abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates

the most hostile environments.

• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.

• Other 2-contact configurations available … please

consult factory.

Part Number Contacts Description*

SDG01.1044

SDG01.1103

SDG01.1110

Part Number

BO

BOW

BOR

BOWR

BOF/HIS.1

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter.

Actuator Keys Sold Separately)

2 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

3 NC

AVAILABLE ACTUATOR KEYS

Description

Standard straight actuator key

(20" minimum closing radius)

Right-angled straight actuator key

(20" minimum closing radius)

Radial entry actuator key

(10" minimum closing radius)

Right-angled bent actuator key

(10" minimum closing radius)

Keyed interlock switch

with front* key entry and

slow action contacts.

*Field-rotatable for key entry from right, left or rear. Units are supplied

with tamper-resistant (one-way) screws to replace the standard

screws after rotating the actuator head for desired direction

of key entry.

Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)

(13.8" Minimum closing radius)

BOF/HIS.2

Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)

(13.8" Minimum closing radius)

28


SDG AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Cast aluminum with enamel paint

Actuator Key

Steel (chromated)

(defeat-resistant design)

Degree of Protection IP67 (Switch housing)

IP00 (Reversing and locking head)

Holding Force

5N (1.2 pounds)

Travel for Positive-Break 12.5mm

Force to Reach

Approx. 5N (1.2 pounds)

Positive-Break

Closing Force

Approx. 5N (1.2 pounds)

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Mechanical Life

1 million operations (minimum)

Shock Resistance >30g / 18ms

Vibration Resistance >15g / 10…200Hz

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE

EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-15

EN ISO 13849-1 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key

used. Please see actuator key

selection chart.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Insulation Voltage

Rated Impulse

Withstand Voltage

Type Terminals

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

2 × 3.5 mm

8A (250VAC)

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

10A (slow-blow)

250VAC

4kV

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13 AWG solid

wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG

stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire

1

DIMENSIONS

M20x1

M20x1

5.5mm

M20x1

29


SDG TECHNICAL DATA

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS

SDG01.1044 SDG01.1103 SDG01.1110

ACTUATOR KEYS

BO

BOW

BOR

BOWR

BOF/HIS.1

BOF/HIS.2

30


1

Safer

by

Design

31


SERIES AZ3350

Tamper-Resistant Movable

Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant die-cast aluminum housing

… tolerates the most hostile environments.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption

upon actuator key removal.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• Four optional key entry locations … depending upon

orientation of rotatable actuator head.

• High-strength actuator key … tolerant to mechanical

abuse without damage.

• Funnel shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Wide selection of actuator keys … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Optional M12x1 quick-connect … please consult factory.

Description

The AZ3350 Series is designed for use with movable machine

guards/access gates which must be closed for operator

safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And

the switch’s tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with

simple tools, bent wires or other readily available means.

Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal

for interlocking safety guards in industrial and hostile

environments.

Operation

The AZ3350 electromechanical safety interlock switch

consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable

guard. Upon opening of the guard, the NC contact(s) are

forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical

linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC

contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)

upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contacts close

upon key removal.)

When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC

contact(s) to close, and the NO contacts to re-open.

Typical Applications

The AZ3350 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access

doors/panels, perimeter access gates, hinged covers and

other movable guards on textile machinery, packaging

equipment, machine tools, assembly machinery, robot work

cells and food/chemical processing equipment.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter. Actuator keys sold separately)

Part Number Contacts (with key inserted)

AZ3350-12ZUEK 1 NO & 2 NC

AZ3350-03ZK 3 NC

Please note: Standard models have the actuator head facing forward.

See page 78 for units with the actuator head rotated to the left (U90)

or right (U270) for use with STS door handles.

Part Number

AZ3350-B1

AZ3350-B1R

AZ3350-B5

AZ3350-B5R

AZ3350-B6

AZ3350-B6H

AZ3350-STS30-01

AZ3350-STS30-02

AZ3350-STS30-03

AZ3350-STS30-04

AZ3350-STS30-05

AZ3350-STS30-06

AZ3350-STS30-07

AZ3350-STS30-08

ACTUATOR KEYS

Description

Straight actuator key

Bent radius actuating key

Straight actuator key, right angle mounting

Bent radius actuating key, right angle mounting

Pivoting straight actuator key, rear mounting

Pivoting straight actuator key, top mounting

STS Door Handle kits for use with AZ3350

switches. (See page 77 for details.)

32

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


AZ3350 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Diecast light alloy with baked

enamel finish

Actuator Key

Chromated steel

(defeat-resistant design)

Degree of Protection IP67

Travel for Positive-Break 10.7 mm (0.4 inches)

Closing Force

Approx. 15 N (3.4 pounds)

Operating Temperature –30°C to +90°C

Mechanical Life

> 10 7 operations

Key Holding Force 30 N (7 pounds) (“R” models only)

Conformity to Standards EN ISO 13849-1 BG-GS-ET-15

EN 60947-5-1 UL

EN 954-1

CSA

CE

Minimum Closing Radius B1 & B5 keys: 150mm

B6, B5-Flex & B6-Flex keys: 100mm

Actuating Speed

Max 0.2 m/s

Actuating Frequency Max 1200 operations per hour

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Fine silver

Contact Configuration Type Zb double-break contact or

3 NC contacts with galvanically

separated contact bridges.

Contact Gap

2 × 1.25mm (minimum)

Contact Rating

4A (230VAC)

4A (24VDC)

Switching Action

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

Short Circuit Protection Fuse 6A (time-delay)

Rated Insulation Voltage 250VAC

Rated Impulse

4kV

Withstand Voltage

Type Terminals Screw terminals (min 0.75mm 2 ,

max 2.5mm 2 – including

conductor ferrules)

1

DIMENSIONS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

31 16 24

29 12.5

AZ3350-12ZUEK

60

2.36

30,5

1.20

13

21

31

14

22

32

5,3

0.21

7,3

0.29

17

0.67

AZ3350-03ZK

11

12

30

1.18

40,5

1.59

M20

38

1.50

21

31

22

32

33


AZ3350 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS

ACTUATOR KEYS

AZ3350-B1

AZ3350-B5

AZ3350-B1R

AZ3350-B5R

AZ3350-B6

AZ3350-B6H

34


1

Safer

by

Design

35


SERIES SHGV

Cable-less Keyed Mechanical Safety Guard

Interlock with Key Transfer System

Features & Benefits

• Highly tamper resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, thereby reducing liability exposure.

• Four optional key entry positions … provides installation

versatility.

• Three optional locking cylinder locations … provides

installation versatility.

Corrosion resistant … tolerates hostile environments.

• Funnel shaped entry … forgiving of mechanical actuator

key misalignment

• Low cost guard locking … eliminates wiring at the guard.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

Description

The SHGV Series consist of a guard-mounted mechanical

locking device and a 2-position key operated selector switch

for control panel mounting. This unique key transfer system

assures the removal of power before allowing the access

control guard to be open … without the need for electrical

wiring at the interlocked machine guard location.

Operation

When the machine guard is open the transfer key (for

operating the 2-position selector switch) cannot be withdrawn

from the guard locking mechanism.

Upon closing of the guard, the mechanical actuator key

permits the transfer-key to be turned (locking the guard) and

withdrawn. The transfer-key can now be removed and inserted

into the 2-position selector switch, allowing it to be operated

(e.g. power to be turned on) … trapping the transfer key in the

“on” position.

To unlock (open) the guard, the selector switch must be

turned to the off position. The transfer-key can now be

withdrawn and inserted into the guard-locking mechanism for

release of the mechanical actuator key and opening of the

guard.

The two lock barrel version allows the removal of a second

transfer key when the mechanical actuator key has been

released. This second transfer key prevents the removal of the

“power control” transfer key from the keyed interlock. Thus it

can be removed from the interlock by the operator to protect

against the inadvertent start-up of the equipment.

Part Number

SHGV/L1 (*) ESS21S2/103

SHGV/R1 (*) ESS21S2/103

SHGV/B1 (*) ESS21S2/103

SHGV/LD1 (*) /

(*) ESS21S2/103

SHGV/RD1 (*) /

(*) ESS21S2/103

AVAILABLE MODELS

Lock Barrel Left

Description

Lock Barrel Right

Lock Barrel Rear

Lock Barrel Left & Lock Barrel

in Front Cover

Lock Barrel Right & Lock Barrel

in Front Cover

Includes guard device SHGV with standard BO actuator

element, keyed selector switch ESS21S2, and contact block

EF103 ( 1NO/1NC)

(*) Individual key identification code stamped on selector

switch cylinder.

Note:

This system is recommended for applications in which there

is no residual motion or hazard after the removal of power.

For applications in which there is residual motion or the

presence of a hazard immediately following the removal of

power, a solenoid-locking console ( Model SVE) is recommended.

Please consult factory.

Typical Applications

Recommended for use where wiring directly to the movable

guard is cost prohibitive or subject to damage due corrosive

chemicals or other harsh environmental conditions.

36

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


SERIES SHGV TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Protection Class IP 65 (Housing) IEC/EN 60529

IP 00 (Control Head) IEC/EN 60529

Actuating Forces Insertion of actuating element - 15 N

Withdrawal of actuating element - 5 N

Ambient temperature - 25 °C to + 70 °C

Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C

Material ALsi 12 painted signal red (RAL 3000)

Housing

Steel passivated with

SHG Cover

Perbunan seals(oil and gasoline resistant)

Mechanical life 2 x 10 6 operating cycles

Shock resistance > 30 x g / 18ms

Vibration resistance > 15 x g/10 ... 200 Hz

Climatic resistance 40/91 to DIN 50015 FW 24 to DIN 50016

Conformity to EN ISO 13849-1 CSA

Standards EN 954-1 EN ISO 13850

CE IEC 60947-5-1

UL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Conformity to Standard IEC/EN 60947-5-1

Protection Class IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529

Contacts

Fine silver

Rated breaking capacity 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A

Rated operating current 230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A

Rated insulation voltage 400VAC / 450VDC

Thermal test current 10 A

Utilization Category

AC-15; DC-13

Max. fuse rating

10 A (slow blow)

Ambient temperature - 25 °C to + 80 °C

Switching frequency 6000 s/h

1

DIMENSIONAL DRAWING FOR SHGV GUARD LOCKING DEVICE

37


SERIES AZ415

Tamper-Resistant Movable

Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption

upon key removal.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical

abuse without damage.

• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the

most hostile environments.

• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds

… permits use of switch as door latch.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

Description

The AZ415 Series is designed for movable machine

guards/access gates which must be closed for operator

safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven

switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And

their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple

tools, bent wires or other readily available means.

Operation

The AZ415 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists

of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique

actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard.

Upon opening of the guard, the NC contacts are forced to

open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with

the actuating key. These NC contacts assure circuit

interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the

actuator key. (The NO contacts close upon key removal.)

In the closed position, the guard is held shut by an adjustable

ball catch integral to the AZ415 housing.

Typical Applications

The AZ415 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on

movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access

doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other

movable guards.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Actuator key sold separately … see below)

Part Number

(AZ415 - Switch Block S1*/

Switch Block S2)

Contact Configuration

with actuator key inserted

(Switch Block S1*/Switch Block S2)

AZ415-11/11ZPK

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZ415-02/20ZPK

2 NC / 2 NO

AZ415-02/11ZPK

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZ415-02/02ZPK

2 NC / 2 NC

*Only Switch Block S1 has positive-break contacts.

ACTUATING KEYS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

AZ/AZM415-B1

AZ/AZM415-B2

AZ/AZM415-B3

AZ/AZM415-B4PS

AZ415-STS30-01

AZ415-STS30-02

AZ415-STS30-03

AZ415-STS30-04

AZ415-STS30-05

AZ415-STS30-06

Description

Linear entry actuator key

Small radius x-axis entry actuator

key (9.8" minimum closing radius)

Small radius y-radius entry actuator

key (9.8" minimum closing radius)

Slide bolt actuator key

STS Door Handle kits for use with

AZ415 switches. See page 77 for

details.

AZ415-STS30-07

AZ415-STS30-08

Optional Safety

Controller.

See Page 333.

MP-AZ415-22

SZ415-22-1

SZ415-22-2

SZ415-1

SZ415-2

Mounting plate

Lockout device for switch

Lockout device for switch

Lockout device for STS door handles

Lockout device for STS door handles

38

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Die-cast aluminum with blue

enamel finish

Actuator Key

key shaft: Zinc coated brass

mounting block: Zinc coated steel

Degree of Protection IP67

Travel for Positive-Break 0.2 inches (5mm)

Force to Reach

Depending upon ball catch setting

Positive-Break

(3.5 pounds minimum)

Actuator Key

Adjustable, 80 to 400 N

Holding Force

Operating Temperature -13°F to +175°F

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE

BG-GS-ET-19 UL

EN ISO 13849-1 CSA

EN 954-1

Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250 mm) with B2 or

B3 actuating key

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Insulation Voltage

Rated Impulse

Withstand

Type Terminals

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

2mm x 2mm

4A (230VAC)

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

Fuse 6A (slow-blow)

250VAC

4kV

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 1.5mm 2

(15AWG) flexible stranded wire

1

DIMENSIONS (mm)

86

3.39 8

.315

22

.87

60,5

2.38

ø6,5

.26

8,6

0.34

36,5

1.44

105

4.13

46

1.81

15

.59

26

1.02

8,6

.34

88

3.46

M20

ø11

.43

mm

inch

Recommended key clearance

less than 3 mm

<

> 3mm

39


AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA

ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS

B2 Actuating radii

For hinged doors over the wide edge

of the actuator

B3 Actuating radii

For hinged doors over the small edge

of the actuator

Dowel holes are also provided in the actuator

body. With the use of dowel pins the

removal of the actuator can be prevented.

By turning the adjusting screw “a,” the

actuator can be brought into any desired

position.

Both actuators can also be used on sliding

doors.

SWITCH TRAVEL AND WIRING DIAGRAMS

AZ415-11/11 AZ415-02/11 AZ415-02/02

AZ415-02/20

11

21

12

22

S2

11

21

12

22

S1

40


AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA

ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS

55

2.17

0-6

0-.24

56

2.20

1

125

4.92

8

.35

18,5

69,5

2.74

9

.35

237

9.33

22

.87

10


42

Safer

by

Design


KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES

WITH SOLENOID LATCHING

2

SELECTION GUIDE

Switch

Series

Housing

Material

Envelope

Dimensions

Contact

Configurations

Catalog

Page

AZM170

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 1 ⁄4" × 2 1 ⁄2" × 5"

Many arrangements

available

see catalog page

44

AZM161

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 1 ⁄4" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 5 1 ⁄8" 1NO/2NC & 1NO/2NC 50

AZM200

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2"

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 Diagnostic Output

54

MZM100

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4"

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 Diagnostic Output

56

TZF/TZM

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 1 ⁄2" × 4" × 5"

1 NO & 2 NC

2 NO & 2 NC

58

TKF/TKM Die-cast aluminum 2 1 ⁄2" × 3 1 ⁄2" × 8" 2 NO & 2 NC 62

TZKF/TZKM

Glass-fiber,

reinforced thermoplastic

1 3 ⁄4" × 2" × 7"

AZM415 Die-cast aluminum 2" × 5" × 5 1 ⁄2"

Many arrangements

available

see catalog page

2 NO & 2 NC

3 NO & 3 NC

66

70

43


SERIES AZM170

Description

The AZM170 Series is designed for machines/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position

and solenoid-latching pin position contacts. These permit the

prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and

the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.

The AZM170 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock

switch joined to a solenoid-latching mechanism. Both the

safety switch and solenoid mechanism feature “positive-break”

contacts. In addition the actuator key features a built-in latch

(unlocked key holding force of 7 pounds), and an auxiliary

manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in

installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when

using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).

Each unit is supplied with a cord grip and a cap to seal the

unused key entry port in the solenoid-latching mechanism.

Typical Applications

The AZM170 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which must not be opened until

dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of

power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,

spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical

applications are textile machines, stamping presses,

articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working

equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.

Solenoid-Latching Machine Guard

Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

Compact design … only 1 1 ⁄4" × 3" × 4 1 ⁄4". Ideal where space

is limited.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of

safety circuit upon actuator key removal.

• Two key entry locations … provide mounting flexibility.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre

reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile

environments.

• High-strength stainless steel actuator key … tolerant to

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Several styles of actuator key … accommodate a wide

variety of movable guards.

• “Power-on” or “Power-off” latching option … for

application versatility.

• Built-in manual unlatching release (via special

triangular key) … for easier installation.

• “Padlockable” key … for added security during

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Units available with quick-connect “ST”, screw

terminals, or insulation displacement connectors (IDC).

Two optional key entrances

44

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

Solenoid-latch bypass/override key “-2197”

(for locking via spring models only)


AZM170 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Order desired actuator key separately)

Part Number Contact Configuration Connections

Spring to Lock/Power to unlock

AZM170-02ZRK 2NC IDC

AZM170-11ZRK 1NO & 1NC IDC

AZM170-02ZRK-ST-2197-* 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170-11ZRK-ST-2197-* 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170SK-02ZRK-2197-* 2NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-11ZRK-2197-* 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals

AZM170ST-11/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170ST-11/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170ST-12/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170ST-12/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170SK-02/01ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-02/10ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NO Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-11/02ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-11/11ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-12/00ZRK-2197-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / no contacts Screw Terminals

Power to Lock – see Note 1 below

AZM170-02ZRKA-* 2NC IDC

AZM170-11ZRKA-* 1NO & 1NC IDC

AZM170-02ZRKA-ST-* 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170-11ZRKA-ST-* 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170SK-02ZRKA-* 2NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-11ZRKA-* 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals

AZM170ST-11/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170ST-11/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170ST-12/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 2NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170ST-12/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / 1NO & 1NC M12x1 Quick Connect

AZM170SK-02/01ZRKA-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-02/10ZRKA-24VAC/DC 2NC / 1 NO Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-11/02ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 2NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-11/11ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 1NC / 1NO & 1NC Screw Terminals

AZM170SK-12/00ZRKA-24VAC/DC 1NO & 2NC / no contacts Screw Terminals

*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via the addition of one of

the following suffix codes:

Voltage

Add Suffix

24VAC/DC

-24VAC/DC

110VAC

-110VAC

230VAC

-230VAC

Note: Models with xx/yy contact designations are available as 24VAC/DC only.

Note: See page 94 for appropriate connector cables for use with ST models.

ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard

to be opened in the event of a power failure.

Generally accepted safety standards/practices

suggest this model only be used after

conducting a thorough risk evaluation in

the context of the application.

Part Number

Description

AZ17/170-B1

Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius)

AZ17/170-B5

Right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing radius)

AZM170-B6

Flexible, close-radius key (1.97" minimum closing radius)

AZ17/170-B11

Elongated standard straight key (7.87" minimum closing radius)

AZ17/170-B15

Elongated right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing radius)

AZ17/170-B1-2245

Standard straight key with vibration-resistant mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius)

AZM-KEY

Solenoid latch bypass/override key (for locking via spring models only)

AZM170-B25-L-G1

Door Handle actuator with star-grip for left-hand hinged guard

AZM170-B25-L-G2

Door Handle actuator with T-grip for left-hand hinged guard

AZM170-B25-R-G1

Door Handle actuator with star-grip for right-hand hinged guard

AZM170-B25-R-G2

Door Handle actuator with T-grip for right-hand hinged guard

MS AZM 170-P

*Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting

MS AZM 170-R/P

*Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or perpendicular mounting

*MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys

2

45


AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing

thermoplastic

Actuator Key

Stainless steel

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Key Holding 30N (7 pounds)

Force

Travel for Positive-Break 11 mm (0.440 inches)

Closing Force

Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)

Locking Force

Approx. 1000N (225 pounds)

Operating Temperature –22°F to +175°F

Solenoid Operating –7°F to +140°F

Temperature

Mechanical Life

> 10 6 operations

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE

EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-19

EN ISO 13849-1 UL

EN 954-1

CSA

Minimum Closing Radius 1.97" (with B6 actuating key)

7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15

actuating key)

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Isolation Voltage

Type Terminals

Solenoid Supply Voltages

PIN ASSIGNMENTS

for M12x1

connectors

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact bridges

4A/230VAC

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

6A (time-delay)

250V

Screw terminals (SK), M12x1 quick

connectors (ST), or insulation

displacement connection (IDC)

24VDC/AC

110VAC 40-60 Hz

230VAC 40-60 Hz

Max. 10 Watts

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

(Power-to-unlock)

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

(Power-to-lock)

11zrk (SK and IDC)

02zrk (SK and IDC)

11zrkA (SK and IDC)

02zrkA (SK and IDC)

A 1

A2

A 1

A2

14

13

22 21

32

12

11

22 21

32

11zrk-ST

02zrk-ST

11zrkA-ST

02zrkA-ST

11/02zrk (SK and ST) 11/11zrk (SK and ST) 11/02zrkA (SK and ST) 11/11zrkA (SK and ST)

Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.

46


AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &

CONTACT SCHEMATICS

(Power-to-unlock)

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &

CONTACT SCHEMATICS

(Power-to-lock)

12/02zrk (ST only)

12/11zrk (ST only)

12/02zrkA (ST only)

12/11zrkA (ST only)

2

12/00zrk (SK only)

12/00zrka (SK only)

02/01zrk (SK only)

02/01zrka (SK only)

02/10zrk (SK only)

02/10zrka (SK only)

Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.

47


48

AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA

DIMENSIONS

108

4.25

24

.94

15

.59

90

3.54

23

.91

17

.67

8,2

.32

ca. 24

.94

76,5

3.01

31

1.22

ø 4,2

.17

ø4-10

.16-.39

45

1.77

M16

30

1.18

8

.31

22

.81

ACTUATOR KEYS

30

1.18 22

.87 20

.79

23

.91

2

.08

10

.40

33

1.30

4,3

.17

5,5

.27

AZ17/170-B1

30

1.18

30

1.18

22

.87

4,3

.17

25

.98

20

.79

12

.47

23

.91

16

.63

2

.08

48

1.89

AZ17/170-B15

30

1.18 22

.87 20

.79

8

.31

23

.91

12

.47

2

.08

36

1.41

7,5

.30

13

.51

4,3

.17

AZ17/170-B5

28

1.10

12

.47

11

.43

7

.28

24

.94

4

.16

32

1.26

2

08

22

.87

30

1.18

20

.79

23

.91

b

a

a

b

AZM170-B6

30

1.18 22

.87 20

.79

23

.91

2

.08

60,5

2.38

37,5

1.48

33

1.30

4,3

.17

AZ17/170-B11

ø11

.43

18

.71

8

.31

13

.51

ø4,2

.17

23

.91

36

1.42

30

1.18

AZ17/170-B1-2245

mm

inch

M20


AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA

DIMENSIONS ST QUICK CONNECT MODELS

B25 Door Handle Actuator

2

Note: For more information on B25 door

handles, see page 82.

MS AZM 170 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT

(Eases installation and facilitates

adjustments due to guard misalignment)

MS AZM 170-P

(for parallel

mounting)

MS AZM 170-R/P

(for parallel or

perpendicular

mounting)

49


AZM161

Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch

Description

The AZM161 Series is designed for machines/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position

and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. There is a mechanical

linkage preventing the solenoid position contacts from

changing unless the key is inserted (guard closed).

The AZM161 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock

switch section with “positive-break” NC contacts and an

actuator key. In addition, the solenoid mechanism features 1

NO and 2 NC solenoid-latching monitoring contacts, and an

auxiliary manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid

in installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when

using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).

Operation

The AZM161 electromechanical safety interlock switch

assembly consists of a rugged switch-solenoid-latching

mechanism and a geometrically-unique locking actuator key.

The switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable

machine guard.

When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position

by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be

opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon

model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.

Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC

contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts

close upon key removal.

The machine is prevented from starting until the actuating key

is inserted (guard is closed) and the solenoid has locked it in

the closed position.

Features & Benefits

• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous

areas until safe conditions exist.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption

upon actuator key removal.

Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully

inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before

“closed” safety signal is provided.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental

requirements.

• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile

environments.

• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation

flexibility.

• Independent actuator key position and locking pin

position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree

of safety.

• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”

models … for application versatility.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse

application requirements.

Typical Applications

The AZM161 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which must not be opened until

dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of

power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,

spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical

applications are textile machines, stamping presses,

articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working

equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.

Optional Safety Controller (see page 320) and

Standstill Monitor (see page 363).

50


AZM161 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter.

Actuator key ordered separately.)

Part Number Contacts Connection

Spring to Lock

AZM161CC-12/12RK-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps

AZM161CC-12/12RKT-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps

AZM161CC-12/12RKN-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps

AZM161SK-12/12RK-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals

AZM161SK-12/12RKT-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals

AZM161SK-12/12RKN-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals

Power to Lock (see Note 1 below)

AZM161CC-12/12RKA-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Cage Clamps

AZM161SK-12/12RKA-* 1NO & 2NC/1NO & 2NC Screw terminals

* Please specify solenoid operating voltage:

-024 for 24V AC/DC

-110/230 for 110/230V AC

Solenoid By-Pass Options (on spring to lock models):

Suffix “T” indicates Emergency Exit Release

(for units mounted inside hazardous area)

Suffix “N” indicates Emergency Release

(for units mounted outside hazardous area)

See page 53 for diagrams

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be

opened in the event of a power failure. Generally

accepted safety standards/practices suggest this

model only be used after conducting a thorough

risk evaluation in the context of the application.

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL

AVAILABLE KEYS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys

Description

AZM161-B1 Standard actuating key

AZM161-B1E Standard actuating key with heavy-duty

mounting bracket

AZM161-B6 Small radius actuating key

AZM161-B6-2177 Funnel entry adapter with elongated

flexible-movement actuating key

AZM161-STS30-01

AZM161-STS30-02

AZM161-STS30-03

AZM161-STS30-04

AZM161-STS30-05

AZM161-STS30-06

AZM161-STS30-07

AZM161-STS30-08

AZM-Key

M16-CG

STS door handle systems for use with

AZM161. See page 77 for details and

selection guide.

Solenoid-latch bypass key

Cord grip (cable gland)

M16- 1 ⁄2"P Plastic 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter

M16- 1 ⁄2"M Metal 1 ⁄2" NPT adapter

PL-M16-24V

PL-M16-120V

MS AZM 161-P

MS AZM 161-R/P

24VAC/DC pilot light kit

120VAC/DC pilot light kit

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting

Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or

perpendicular mounting

2

MS AZM 161 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT

(Eases installation and facilitates adjustments due to guard misalignment)

MS AZM 161-R/P

(for parallel or

perpendicular mounting)

MS AZM 161-P

(for parallel mounting)

51


AZM161 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing

thermoplastic

Actuator Key

Stainless steel

(defeat-resistant design)

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)

Travel for Positive-Break 8mm (0.315 inches)

Force to Reach

10N (Approx. 2.4 pounds)

Positive-Break

Closing Force

Approx. 15 N (3.4 pounds)

Operating Temperature –13°F to +104°F

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 CE

EN 60947-5-1 BG-GS-ET-19

EN ISO 13849-1 UL

EN 954-1

CSA

Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (440 pounds)

Key Return Force 0N

Minimum Closing Radius 5.9" (150mm) with B1 and B1E

actuating key

3.7" (95mm) with B6 actuating key

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Fine silver

Contact Configuration Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

Contact Gap

2 × 2 mm (minimum)

Contact Rating

4A (230VAC)

Switching Action

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

Short Circuit Protection Fuse 6A (time-delay)

Rated Insulation Voltage 250VAC

Rated Impulse

6kV

Withstand Voltage

Type Terminals*

Screw terminals

Cage Clamps

Available Solenoid

24VDC, 110VDC, 230VDC

Supply Voltages (Vs) 24VAC/50Hz

115VAC/60Hz

230VAC/50Hz

Solenoid Power

10W (maximum)

Consumption

Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%

Solenoid Pull-in Voltage (0.85 to 1.1) Vs

Solenoid Drop-out Voltage (0.2 to 0.75) Vs

*Optional quick disconnect versions available.

Please consult factory.

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS (Solenoid-mechanism not energized)

AZM 161SK-12/12rk

AZM 161SK-12/12rka

52

Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.


AZM161 TECHNICAL DATA

DIMENSIONS (Switch & Actuator Keys)

8

.31

40

1.57

78

3.07

72

2.83

Ø 4

.18

29

1.14

30

1.18

30

1.18

7

.28

18

.71

90

3.54

5,5

.22

M16

M16

M16

130

5.12

56

2.20

30

1.18

10

.39

ø 5,5

.22

56

2.20

5

.2

40 +

- 0

1.57

56

2.20

16

.63

32,7

1.29

32,7

1.29

30

1.18

14

.55

5

2

mm

inch

AZM161-B1 AZM161-B1E AZM161-B6

b

2

.08

.20

ø5,5

.22

ø10,5

.41

11

a

16

.63

.43

27

1.06

2

.08

27

1.06

2

.08

ø5,5

.22

40

1.57

a

b

Solenoid Latch By-pass Release examples (spring-to-lock models)

standard model manual

release point by-pass

using separate

AZM-Key

Type "T" integrated Emergency Exit

release lever for mounting

inside hazardous area

Type "N" integrated release

lever for mounting outside

hazardous area

53


SERIES AZM 200

Description

The AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock and

actuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exit

handle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing,

protecting the actuator and the operator against damage and

injury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator

and interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator

still engages the interlock.

Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle,

the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even during

a power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model).

The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with two

short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can

switch up to 250 mA.

With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of

the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,

up to 31 AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in series

without detriment to the safety performance level/control

category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1/Control Category 4 to

EN 954-1).

Typical Applications

The AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which must not be opened until

dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of

power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,

spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical

applications are textile machines, stamping machines,

metal working equipment, printing presses and

packaging machines.

54

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Solenoid Interlock

Features & Benefits

• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardous

areas until safe conditions exist.

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—no

additional door handles are needed.

• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states

• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …

satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1 Safety

Control Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note Below.

• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be

left quickly and safely—even during a power failure.

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door opening …

no risk of injury or damage from a protruding actuator.

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

AVAILABLE AZM200 MODELS

Part Number

Description

Spring to Lock, Power to unlock

AZM200SK-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)

AZM200SK-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw

Terminals)

AZM200ST1-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick

connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST1-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1

quick connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST2-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick

connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST2-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1

quick connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST-T1P2P-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &

LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)

Power to Lock, Spring to unlock

AZM200SK-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)

AZM200SK-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw

Terminals)

AZM200ST1-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick

connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST1-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1

quick connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST2-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick

connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST2-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1

quick connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST-T1P2PA-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &

LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)

ACTUATORS

Part Number

Description

AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left

AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left with inside emergency door release

AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right

AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right with inside emergency door

release

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

with inside emergency door release

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

with inside emergency door release


SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS

Part number: SZ200

Description:

Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocks

Connector Cables for ST Models

Please see page 94 for appropriate connector cable part numbers.

ST1 versions use M12, 8 pin connectors

(part numbers starting A-K8P-M12...)

ST2 versions use M23, 9 pin connectors

(part numbers starting A-K8+1-M23...)

ST versions use M23, 12 pin connectors

(part numbers starting A-K12P-M23...)

*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with

various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.

2

Safety Control Module Requirements Dualchannel

safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. See

page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL safety control modules.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for

reset function and/or feedback monitoring functions,

as well as increased output current requirements.

AZM200...2568 includes pushbutton

for authorized release at switch site.

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see

page 172 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.

55


SERIES MZM 100

Non-Contact Magnetic-Latching Interlock

Features & Benefits

• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardous

areas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holding

force).

• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical wear

due to non-contact design.

• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states

• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …

satisfy requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, Control

Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note Below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanical

latching required (“r” version only).

• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal where

high hygienic standards need to be maintained.

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.

AVAILABLE MZM100 MODELS

Description

The MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated.

The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock and

actuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 N

holding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detects

and monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensor

technology permits an offset between the actuator and interlock

of ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal.

The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channel

design with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of

which can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanently

electronically measured and monitored. If the holding

force drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled,

recognizing a dirty interlock.

With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of

the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,

up to 31 MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired

in series without detriment to the Safety Performance Level

control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/Control Category 4

per EN954-1).

Typical Applications

The MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which must not be opened until

dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of

power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,

spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical

applications are textile machines, stamping machines,

food processing equipment, metal working equipment,

wood working and packaging machines.

Part Number

MZM100ST-1P2PA

MZM100ST-SD2PA

MZM100ST-1P2PRA

MZM100ST-SD2PRA

Description

2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic

output

2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic

output*

2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic

output, with variable latching (30N to

240N)

2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic

output*, with variable latching (30N to

240N)

*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with

various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.

ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

MZM100-B1.1

Actuator

MS MZM 100-W

Mounting Set

Note: For appropriate connector cable, please see page 96.

Order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL

safety control modules.

Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.

56


SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only)

Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Response Time

≤ 100ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Mounting

40mm profiles

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-1 UL/CSA

EN 954-1 EN ISO 13849-1

IEC 61508

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Magentic & Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 1.0A

No Load Current 0.5A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output

0.25A per output

Operating Current

Safety Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Termination

Connector M23x1

2

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see

page 178 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.

57


SERIES TZF/TZM

Description

The TZF/TZM Series is designed for machines/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position

and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the

prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and

the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.

The TZF/TZM Series consists of an electromechanical safety

interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking

actuator key. In addition, the TZFS model features an auxiliary

manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in

installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when

using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).

Operation

The TZF/TZM Series of electromechanical safety interlock

switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated

latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique

actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to

a movable machine guard.

When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position

by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by

energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the

latching mechanism.

Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC

contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts

close upon key removal.

The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and

a NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC

contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety

switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting

until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the

solenoid has locked it in the closed position.

Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching

Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls

access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption

upon actuator key removal.

Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully

inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before

“closed” safety signal is provided.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental

requirements.

• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile

environments.

• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator

head provides installation versatility.

• Independent actuator key position and locking pin

position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree

of safety.

• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Special types for food industry … please consult factory.

Typical Applications

The TZF/TZM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock

switch on movable machine guards which must not be

opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the

removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel

overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.

Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,

articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working

equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.

TZF (SPRING TO LOCK) RELEASE OPTIONS

TZF…S manual keyed release

Use TZ-69 or

TZ-75 key to

release solenoid

and reset

TZF…N Emergency release knob

Pull knob to release Solenoid,

reset with the

TZ-69 or

TZ-75 key

58

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


SERIES TZF/TZM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter and

TZ/CO Standard Actuator key)

Part Number

TZFS-*

TZFCS-*

TZFWS-*

TZFCWS

TZM-*

TZMC-*

TZMW-*

TZMCW

*Please indicate desired operation voltage:

Voltage:

Suffix:

24VDC

no suffix

115VAC -115

230VAC -230

Contacts

Spring lock / Power to unlock

2 NC (series) & 1 NO

2 NC (series) & 2 NO

2 NC (parallel) & 1 NO

2 NC (parallel) & 2 NO

Power to lock / spring unlock (see Note 1 below)

2 NC (series) & 1 NO

2 NC (series) & 2 NO

2 NC (parallel) & 1 NO

2 NC (parallel) & 2 NO

For Spring to Lock (TZF) models:

For a manual emergency release, change “S” to “N” in the

part number (TZFN)

OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

TZ/CO

Standard straight actuator key

(13" minimum closing radius)

TZ/CW

Right-angled straight actuator key

(11.8" minimum closing radius)

TZ/COR Radial entry actuator key

(11.8" minimum closing radius)

TZ/CK

Short straight actuator key

(6.3" minimum closing radius)

TZ/CWR Right-angled bent actuator key

(11.8" minimum closing radius)

TZ/COF/HIS.1 Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)

(13.8" minimum closing radius)

TZ/COF/HIS.2 Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)

(13.8" minimum closing radius)

TZ/CORF/HIS.1 Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)

(7.1" minimum closing radius)

TZ/CORF/HIS.2 Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)

(5.9" minimum closing radius)

TZ-69

Straight safety interlock auxiliary release key

(for TZF models)

TZ-75

Right-angled safety interlock auxiliary release

key (for TZF models)

2

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock

model permits the guard

to be opened in the event

of a power failure.

Generally accepted safety

standards/practices suggest

this model only be

used after conducting a

thorough risk evaluation

in the context of the

application.

DIMENSIONS

TZ/69

Three-square socket wrench

for versions TZF…(supplied)

59


SERIES TZF/TZM TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing

thermoplastic

Actuator Key

Galvanized steel

(defeat-resistant design)

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Holding Force 20N (4.8 pounds)

Travel for Positive-Break 14.5 mm

Force to Reach

20N (Approx. 4.8 pounds)

Positive-Break

Closing Force

Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)

Operating Temperature –13°F to +104°F

Mechanical Life

2 million operations (minimum)

Shock Resistance 30g / 11ms

Vibration Resistance 20g / 10…55Hz

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 UL

EN 60947-5-1 CSA

EN ISO 13849-1

EN 954-1

CE

BG-GS-ET-15

Solenoid Locking Force 1,700N (380 pounds)

Minimum Closing Radius Dependent upon actuator key used.

Please see actuator key selection

chart.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Insulation Voltage

Rated Impulse

Withstand Voltage

Type Terminals

Available Solenoid

Voltages

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

Guard monitoring: 2 × 3.5 mm

Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 3 mm

8A (250VAC)

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

10A (slow-blow)

250VAC

4kV

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13 AWG solid

wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG

stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire

24VDC

115VAC

230VAC

Solenoid Power

8.8W (maximum)

Consumption

Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS

TZM (power-to-lock) models

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS

TZF (spring lock/power-to-unlock) models

TZM

TZMW

TZFS

TZFWS

TZMC

TZMCW

TZFCS

TZFCWS

Note: Drawings show contact state with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.

60


SERIES TZF/TZM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS

ACTUATOR KEYS

TZ/CO TZ/CW TZ/COR

2

TZ/CWR TZ/COF/HIS.1 TZ/COF/HIS.2

TZ/CORF/HIS.1 TZ/CORF/HIS.2 TZ/CK

61


SERIES TKF/TKM

Description

The TKF/TKM Series is designed for machines/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position

and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the

prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and

the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.

The TKF/TKM Series consists of an electromechanical safety

interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking

actuator key. In addition, the TKFS model features an auxiliary

manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in

installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when

using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).

Operation

The TKF/TKM Series of electromechanical safety interlock

switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated

latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique

actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to

a movable machine guard.

When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position

by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by

energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the

latching mechanism.

Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC

contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts

close upon key removal.

The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and a

NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC

contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety

switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting

until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the

solenoid has locked it in the closed position.

Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching

Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls

access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption

upon actuator key removal.

Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully

inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before

“closed” safety signal is provided (Series TKM).

• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental

requirements.

• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates

mechanical abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates

hostile environments.

• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator

head provides installation versatility.

• Independent actuator key position and locking pin

position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree

of safety.

• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment

maintenance.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse

application requirements.

• Special types available for concealed installation …

please consult factory.

Typical Applications

The TKF/TKM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock

switch on movable machine guards which must not be

opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the

removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel

overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.

Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,

articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working

equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.

62

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


SERIES TKF/TKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter. Actuator key sold separately)

Part Number Solenoid Operating Voltage Contacts Description

TKF/90

TKF/*/90

24VDC

115/230VAC (50/60Hz)

2NC & 2 NO

(NC contacts

in series)

“Series” actuating key locked by spring and unlocked by

energizing solenoid

TKM/90

TKM/*/90

TKF/R/90

TKF/R*/90

24VDC

115/230VAC (50/60Hz)

24VDC

115/230VAC (50/60Hz)

2NC & 2 NO

(NC contacts

in series)

2NC & 2 NO

(NC contacts

in series)

“Series” actuating key locked by energizing solenoid and

unlocked by spring (See Note 1 below)

“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion) locked

by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid

2

TKM/R/90

TKM/R*/90

24VDC

115/230VAC (50/60Hz)

2NC & 2 NO

(NC contacts

in series)

“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion)

locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring

(See Note 1 below)

TKF/L/90

TKF/L*/90

24VDC

115/230VAC (50/60Hz)

2NC & 2 NO

(NC contacts

in series)

“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion) locked

by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid

TKM/L/90

TKM/L*/90

24VDC

115/230VAC (50/60Hz)

2NC & 2 NO

(NC contacts

in series)

“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion)

locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring

(See Note 1 below)

* Insert 115 for 115VAC model

Insert 230 for 230VAC model

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be opened in the event of a power failure. Generally accepted

safety standards/ practices suggest this model only be used after conducting a thorough risk evaluation in the

context of the application.

Part Number

TK/R/90

TK/RF/90

TK/P/90

TK/PF/90

ACTUATOR KEYS

Description

Standard “Series” actuator key (For sliding guards

only)

“Series” actuator key with telescopic section (For

sliding guards only)

“Parallel” actuator key for right- or left-hand

insertion (10” minimum closing radius)

“Parallel” actuator key (with telescopic section) for

right- or left-hand insertion (10” minimum closing

radius)

63


SERIES TKF/TKM TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Cast aluminum, enamel finish

Actuator Key &

Steel, chromated

Locking Bolt

(defeat-resistant design)

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Holding Force 5N (1.2 pounds)

Travel for Positive-Break 72 mm (“Series” actuator)

38 mm (“Parallel” actuator)

Force to Reach

5N (Approx. 1.2 pounds)

Positive-Break

Closing Force

Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)

Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F

Mechanical Life

1 million operations (minimum)

Shock Resistance 30g / 18ms

Vibration Resistance 20g / 2…100Hz

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 UL

EN 60947-5-1 CSA

EN ISO 13849-1

EN 954-1

CE

BG-GS-ET-15

Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (450 pounds)

Minimum Closing Radius 250mm (“Parallel” actuator)

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Insulation Voltage

Rated Impulse

Withstand Voltage

Type Terminals

Available Solenoid

Voltages

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

Guard monitoring: 2 × 3 mm

Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 2 mm

8A (250VAC)

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

10A (slow-blow)

250VAC

4kV

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13 AWG solid

wire (2.5mm 2 ) or 13 AWG

stranded (1.5mm 2 ) wire

24VDC

115VAC/230VAC

Solenoid Power

12.0W (maximum)

Consumption

Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%

DIMENSIONS

64


SERIES TKF/TKM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS

ACTUATOR KEYS

“Series”TK/R/90

(For sliding guards only)

“Series”TK/RF/90 (With telescopic section)

(For sliding guards only)

2

(For sliding guards only)

“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/P/90

“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/PF/90 (With telescopic section)

65


SERIES TZKF/TZKM

Description

The TZK Series is designed for machines/work cells where

access to a hazardous work area must be controlled until safe

conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature permits

locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions, which

may exist immediately after removal of power, have abated.

Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay, motion

detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

The unit’s contact arrangement permits the prevention of a

machine restart until the guard is closed and in the locked

position.

Each unit is supplied with a 1 ⁄2" NPT conduit adapter.

Operation

The TZK Series electromechanical safety interlock switch

consists of a rugged switch with a solenoid-latching

mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The

switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable

machine guard.

When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position

by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be

opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon

model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.

Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s ”positive-break” NC

contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts

close upon key removal.

Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching

Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous

areas until safe conditions exist.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple

tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit interruption

upon key removal.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental sealing

requirements.

• Positive locking … integral mechanical interlock prevents

solenoid latching until actuating key is fully inserted.

• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical

abuse without damage.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the

most hostile environments.

• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”

models … for application versatility.

• Optional “floating” actuator key … tolerates up to 5mm of

guard misalignment without damage.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Rotatable actuating head … four user-selectable 90°

positions for installation flexibility.

• Funnel entry … forgiving of minor guard misalignment.

• Optional spring-loaded actuator keys … tolerates axial

misalignment of guard.

• Built-in key entry dust cover … prevents ingress of dirt

and dust when key is removed.

Typical Applications

The TZK Series is intended for use as a safety interlock

switch on movable machine guards which must not be

opened until dangerous conditions, that may exist after the

removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel

overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.

Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,

articulating robot arms, mixing machines, heavy working

equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.

Release Options for TZKF (locking via spring models)

TZKF…S

Auxiliary Release

TZ-75

TZKF…N

Emergency Release

TZ-69

66

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


SERIES TZKF/TZKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Includes 1 ⁄2" NPT Adapter.

Order desired actuator key separately.)

Part Number

TZKF/BS*

TZKF/CS*

TZKF/ES*

TZKF/HS

TZKF/KS

TZKF/MS

TZKF/PS

TZKM/B*

TZKM/C*

TZKM/E*

TZKM/H

TZKM/K

TZKM/M

TZKM/P

Contacts (Key/Solenoid)

Spring lock, Power to unlock

1 NC / 2 NC

1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO / 2 NC

2 NC / 2 NC

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC

Power to lock, spring unlock (see Note 1 below)

1 NC / 2 NC

1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO / 2 NC

2 NC / 2 NC

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC

*Please indicate desired operation voltage:

Voltage:

Suffix:

24VDC

no suffix

115VAC -115

230VAC -230

Example: TZKF/CS-115

For Spring to Lock (TZKF) models:

For a manual emergency release, change

"S" to "N" in the part number (TZKF/BN)

Part Number

TZK/CO

TZK/CW

TZK/COF

TZK/CORF/7.5

TZK/CORF/15

TZK/APL

TZ-69

TZ-75

ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES

Description

Standard straight actuating key

Standard right-angle actuating key

Spring-loaded actuator key tolerates axial

movement of +7.5°/-15° or -7.5°/+15°

depending upon mounting orientation

Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key

tolerates axial movement of +7.5° or -7.5°

depending upon mounting orientation

Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key

tolerates axial movement of +15° or -15°

depending upon mounting orientation

Mounting adapter plate facilitates easy

alignment between actuating key and interlock

Standard straight auxiliary release key

(for TZKF models)

Right-angle auxiliary release key

(for TZKF models)

Note 1: Use of power-to-lock model permits the guard to be

opened in the event of a power failure. Generally

accepted safety standards/practices suggest this

model only be used after conducting a thorough

risk evaluation in the context of the application.

2

DIMENSIONS (Basic Switch & Optional Mounting Adapter Plate)

89

3.50 32

1.26

12

.47

2,3

.09

TZK/APL

Mounting Adapter Plate

M6

70

2.76

6

.24

50

1.97

12

.47

45

1.77

30

1.18

116

4.57

178

7.01

6

.24

6

.24

178

7.01

193

7.60

206

8.11

4,5

.18

72

2.83

M20x1

12

.47

14,5

5.7

6,5

.26

24

.94

29,5

1.16

22,5

.89

6

.24

22

.87

17,5

.69

12

.47

41

1.61

mm

inch

67


7,5°

SERIES TZKF/TZKM TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing

thermoplastic

Actuator Key

Galvanized steel

Degree of Protection IP67

Travel for Positive-Break 2.3mm

Key Insertion Force 10 N (2.2 pounds)

Key Holding Force 20 N (4.4 pounds)

(without solenoid-latching)

Solenoid Locking Force 2,000N (440 pounds)

Operating Temperature +32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)

Mechanical Life

2 x 10 6 Operations (minimum)

Mounting Orientation Any position

Solenoid Override Manual release from front surface

Slack Resistance 30g / 11ms

Vibration Resistance 20g / 10-55Hz

Switching Frequency 120 cycles/hour (maximum)

Conformity to Standards IEC 947 CE

EN 60947 UL

EN ISO 13849-1 CSA

EN 954-1

BG-GS-ET-19

Minimum Closing Radius 6.9" (175mm) for CO and CORF

actuating key

9.8" (250mm) for CW actuating key

5.9" (150mm) for COF actuating key

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Silver-plated, gold

Contact Configuration Double-pole, double-break,

electrically-separated contact

bridges

Contact Rating 8A/250VAC (AC 15)

13A/24VDC (DC13)

Switching Action

Slow-action, positive-break

NC contacts

Short Circuit Protection 10A

Rated Insulation Voltage 250VAC

Rated Impulse Withstand 2.5 KV

Voltage

Type Terminals

Screw terminals with self-lifting

cable clamps for up to 13AWG

flexible stranded wire (1.5mm 2 )

Available Solenoid Voltages 24VDC

115VAC/50-60 Hz

230VAC/50-60 Hz

Solenoid Power

10W (maximum)

Consumption

Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%

ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS

TZK/CO Straight Actuating Key

TZK/CW Right-Angle Actuating Key

52

2.07

6,5

.26

53,5

2.11

3

.12

8

.31

11

.43

30

1.18

13,5

.53

20

.79

4,3

.17

48

1.89

6,5

.26

8,5

.33

57,5

2.26

25

.98

32

1.26

13,5

.53

40

1.57

13

.51

30

1.18 45

1.77

TZK/CORF/15 Flexibly-Mounted “Floating”

Actuator Key

TZK/CORF/7.5 Pre-Tensioned

Flexibly-Mounted Actuator Key

48

1.89

6,5

.26

8,5

.33

57,5

2.26

3

.12

25

.98

32

1.26

3

.12

15°

60

2.36

16,5

.65

48

1.89

16,5

.65

13,5

.53

13,5

.53

68


SERIES TZKF/TZKM TECHNICAL DATA

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS — TZKM (power-to-lock) models

TZKM/B

TZKM/C

TZKM/E

TZKM/H

2

TZKM/K

TZKM/M

TZKM/P

Note:

Drawings show contact state

with actuator key inserted

and solenoid de-energized.

CONTACT CONFIGURATIONS — TZKF (spring lock/power to unlock) models

TZKF/BS

TZKF/CS

TZKF/ES

TZKF/HS

TZKF/KS

TZKF/MS

TZKF/PS

Note:

Drawings show contact state

with actuator key inserted

and solenoid de-energized.

69


SERIES AZM415

Description

The AZM415 Series is designed for movable machine guards

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time-delay,

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

Latching may occur upon energizing or de-energizing the

solenoid — depending upon model. In addition the AZM415

features “positive-break” NC contacts, and an adjustable-force

ball latch which maintains a holding force on the guard when

the key is in the unlocked state.

A two-key model is also available for guards which may be

open in two directions (Model AZM415-33zpdk).

Operation

The AZM415 two-piece electromechanical safety interlock

switch consists of a rugged switch and solenoid-latching

mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The

switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable

machine guard.

When the guard is closed, the actuator key is locked in

position by a toggle-lever system. The guard may only be

opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon

model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.

Upon opening of the guard the switch’s “positive-break” NC

contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)

mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts

close upon key removal.

70

Safety controller see page 320,

Speed monitors see page 363

Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching

Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous

areas until safe conditions exist.

• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption

upon actuator key removal.

• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.

• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical

abuse without damage.

• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the

most hostile environments.

• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds

… permits use of switch as door latch.

• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking”

models … for application versatility.

• Designed to meet Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• *Increased locking force … up to 560 pounds.

• Patented toggle-lever locking system … facilitates easy

unlocking of (even heavily misaligned) guards.

• Two-key model … for double-sided guards (AZM415-33zpdk).

• Optional B4 Actuator Key … prevents unintentional guard

closure.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Actuator key ordered separately)

Part Number

Contacts (solenoid/key)

Spring to Lock

AZM415-02/02ZPK-*

2 NC / 2 NC

AZM415-02/11ZPK-*

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZM415-02/20ZPK-*

2 NC / 2 NO

AZM415-11/02ZPK-*

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC

AZM415-11/11ZPK-*

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZM415-11/20ZPK-*

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO

Spring to Lock, with maunal release

AZM415-02/02ZPKT-24VAC/DC 2 NC / 2 NC

AZM415-02/11ZPKT 24VAC/DC 2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZM415-02/20ZPKT 24VAC/DC 2 NC / 2 NO

AZM415-11/02ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC

AZM415-11/11ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZM415-11/20ZPKT 24VAC/DC 1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO

Power to Lock (see Note 1 below)

AZM415-02/02ZPKA-*

2 NC / 2 NC

AZM415-02/11ZPKA-*

2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZM415-02/20-ZPKA-*

2 NC / 2 NO

AZM415-11/02-ZPKA-*

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC

AZM415-11/11ZPKA-*

1 NO & 1 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC

AZM415-11/20ZPKA-*

1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NO

*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of the

following suffix codes:

-24VAC/DC -110VAC -230VAC

ACTUATING KEYS

Part Number

Description

AZ/AZM415-B1

Linear entry actuator key

(For sliding lift-off guards)

AZ/AZM415-B2

Small radius (250mm) x-axis entry actuator

key (For hinged guards)

AZ/AZM415-B3

Small radius (250mm) y-radius entry actuator

key (For hinged guards)

AZ/AZM415-B4PS Slide bolt actuator key (For sliding guards)

AZM415-STS30…

STS door handle systems. See page 77 for

details and selection guide.

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Die-cast aluminum with blue

enamel finish

Actuator Key

key shaft: Zinc coated brass

mounting block: Zinc coated steel

Degree of Protection IP67

Travel for Positive-Break 5mm (0.2 inches)

Force to Reach

Positive-Break

Solenoid Locking Force

Actuator Key

Holding Force

Operating Temperature

Mechanical Life

Depending upon ball catch setting

(3.5 pounds minimum)

560 pounds

Adjustable, 80 to 400 N

-13°F to +175°F

1 million operations

Conformity to Standards IEC 947-5-1 UL

BG-GS-ET-19 CSA

EN ISO 13849-1

EN 954-1

CE

Minimum Closing Radius 9.8" (250mm)

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Contact Configuration

Contact Gap

Contact Rating

Switching Action

Short Circuit Protection

Rated Insulation Voltage

Rated Impulse

Withstand

Type Terminals

Available Solenoid

Supply Voltages (Vs)

Fine silver

Double-pole, double-break with

electrically separated contact

bridges

2mm x 2mm

4A (230VAC)

Slow-action, positive-break NC

contacts

Fuse 6A (slow-blow)

250VAC

4kV

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13AWG

flexible stranded wire (1.5 mm 2 )

24VAC/DC

115VAC/60Hz

230VAC/50Hz

Solenoid Power

10W (maximum)

Consumption

Solenoid Duty Cycle 100%

2

DIMENSIONS

M20

Model with “T”

manual override

71


AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA

WIRING SCHEMATICS

AZM415xx/yyZPK (Power-to-unlock)

11/11

WIRING SCHEMATICS

AZM415xx/yyZPKA (Power-to-lock)

11/11

11/02

11/02

11/20

11/20

02/11

02/11

02/02

02/02

02/20

02/20

72 Contacts shown with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.


9

AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA

ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS

B4pS Actuator for Hand Operated Locking

B1 Actuator

125

4.92

55

2.17

0-6

0-.24

56

2.20

20

.79

21

.83

35

1.38

237

9.33

22

.87

8

.35

.35

18,5

69,5

2.74

2

19

.75

30

1.18

6,5

.26

10


74

Safer

by

Design


APPLICATION ACCESSORIES

STS Safety Handle

Assembly

B25

Safety Door Handle

TG

Safety Door Handle

3

Page 76

Page 82

Page 84

ZSD

Enabling Device

TFH

Safety Foot Switch

SEPK(G) Two-Hand

Control Consoles

Page 88

Page 90

Page 92

TFA/TFI

Guard Alignment Aid

Connection

Cables

Page 81

Page 94

75


SERIES STS

Safety Guard Door-Handle System

(with Emergency Release Option)

Features & Benefits

• Suited for all types of guards ... for application versatility.

• Dual-purpose handle ... unlatches and opens guard.

No additional door handles are needed.

• Optional inside “emergency” release handle available ...

heightens system safety level.

• Interlock switch mountable from inside or outside

guard … for application flexibility.

• Rugged, durable design ... actuator designed for 15,000 N

(3,400 pounds) of shear force.

• Mechanical design facilitates easy actuator key

withdrawal ... without “sticking” or “binding.”

• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... provides for

emergency egress.

Description

The STS door handle system consists of one safety interlock

switch (ordered separately), an actuator key and handle

assembly (with or without emergency release handle),

mounting plates, and an optional lockout/tagout device. An

optional red interior release handle is available which opens

the guard from the inside in case of an emergency.

Operation

Should someone find themselves in a hazardous area and

the guard is accidentally closed, the guard can be opened

from the inside by turning the optional emergency handle (2).

Locking of the guard from the inside is not possible.

When using the optional emergency handle with a solenoidlatching

keyed interlock switch (AZM161 or AZM415), always

order the version with an emergency unlocking feature. In this

case the emergency latching release button or knob (1)

provided with this model must be actuated before operating

the emergency release handle (2).

AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

MP TG-01 Handle mounting plate for

inside mounted actuators

TFA-010

TFI-010

TFA-020

TFI-020

SZ 415-1

SZ 415-2

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

Please see page 77

Alignment aid for outside mounting

(for hinged guards)

Alignment aid for inside mounting

(for hinged guards)

Alignment aid for outside mounting

(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)

Alignment aid for inside mounting

(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)

Lockout tag for STS30-01/-03/-06/-08

Lockout tag for STS30-02/-04/-05/-07

76


SERIES STS

SELECTION TABLE & ORDERING GUIDE: SAFETY DOOR-HANDLE SYSTEM

Actuator

Mounting Position

Actuator

Door Hinge

With

emergency handle

Inside

Right


XX-STS30-01*

Left


XX-STS30-02*

Outside

Right

XX-STS30-05

3

Left

XX-STS30-06



Without

emergency handle

Inside

Right

Left

➛ ➛

XX-STS30-03*

XX-STS30-04*

Outside

Right

XX-STS30-07

Left

XX-STS30-08



*For actuators mounted on the inside, mounting plate MP TG-01

(ordered separately) must be used to mount the door handle

when the door frame width is smaller than the handle.



View from outside the hazardous area

View from inside the hazardous area

77


SERIES STS

TO ORDER COMPLETE STS DOOR HANDLE SYSTEM

STS Door Handle Systems are available with actuator keys for the following switch series:

AZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 13

AZ3550* . . . . . . . . . . see page 32

AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . see page 38

AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . see page 51

AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . see page 70

1. Complete the STS door handle catalog number on the previous page by replacing

XX with the desired safety interlock switch.

2. Order Safety Switch separately.

*Please note: STS door handles to be used with AZ3350

switches require special versions of the switch with the actuator

head rotated to the left (U90) or right (U270) to accommodate

key entry when properly mounted. Please order one of these

part numbers:

Model

Description

AZ3350-12zuek-U90

AZ3350-12zuek-U270

AZ3350-03zk-U90

AZ3350-03zk-U270

Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left

Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right

Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left

Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right

Example: To order a safety door handle system with a right-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,

for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 415-11/11XPKT-24 VAC/DC safety inerlock switch,

order SCHMERSAL part numbers:

• AZM 415-STS30-01

• AZM-11/11XPKT-24 VAC/DC

Note: If door frame is smaller than the handle assembly, also order the MP TG-01 Mounting Plate

Example: To order a safety door handle system with a left-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,

for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 161SK-12/12RKT safety inerlock switch, order

SCHMERSAL part numbers:

• AZM 161-STS30-02

• AZM 161SK-12/12RKT

78


SERIES STS DIMENSIONS

AZ 16-STS30-…

AZ 3350-STS30-…

AZ 415-STS30-…

AZ 16 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07

AZ 3350 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07

AZ 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07

3

AZ 16 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08

AZ 3350 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08

AZ 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08

AZM 161-STS30-…

AZM 415-STS30-…

AZM 161 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07

AZM 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07

AZM 161 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08

AZM 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08

Side View Dimensions

Inside Mounting

STS30-01/-02/-03/-04

Outside Mounting

STS30-05/-06/-07/-08

79


SERIES STS ACCESSORIES

Lockout Accessory

MP TG-01 Handle Mounting Plate

ORDERING DETAILS

Lockout Tag

for … STS30-01/-03/-06/-08 SZ 415-1

for … STS30-02/-04/-05/-07 SZ 415-2

80


SERIES TFA/TFI

Guard Alignment Aid

Features & Benefits

• Self-aligning … self-centering design helps align guard.

• End-stop … functions as end-stop to protect guard from

excessive shock on closing.

• Easy-to-install … on inside or outside of guard.

• Reduces maintenance … minimizes risk of downtime due

to misaligned guard.

• Suitable for retrofit … on existing guards.

AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

TFA-010

TFI-010

TFA-020

TFI-020

Alignment aid for outside mounting

(for hinged guards)

Alignment aid for inside mounting

(for hinged guards)

Alignment aid for outside mounting

(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)

Alignment aid for inside mounting

(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)

3

TFA Guard Alignment Aid (for outside mounting)

• Mounting outside

• Self-centering of the guard door

• End stop

• Suitable for all types of actuators

• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted

TFI Guard Alignment Aid (for inside mounting)

• Mounting inside

• Self-centering of the guard door

• End stop

• Suitable for all types of actuators

• Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted

81


SERIES B25

Safety Door Handle System

for AZ17 Interlock Switches

Features & Benefits

• Ergonomically-designed door handles … for easy

operation.

• Pre-machined mounting plates … for easy installation.

• Dual-purpose handle … releases interlock acutator key

and opens guard.

• Low-profile design … minimizes protruding handle.

• No protruding actuator … recessed actuator key when

guard is open makes for safer installation.

• User flexibility … actuator can be supplied without

handle. Users can mount their own handle design on the

integral, pre-tapped (M6) 8mm square shaft.

Description

The Series BN25 is designed to allow easy realization of a

combination door handle and safety interlock for use on light

to medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each

unit consists of a door handle assembly with integral handle

and safety interlock actuator key for operating a Series

AZ17…zrk interlock switch.

Operation

Upon manual turning of the star-grip or T-grip handle, the

safety interlock switch actuator key is withdrawn from the

switch body … opening the positive-break, normally-closed

switch contacts (and, if so equipped, closing the normallyopen

switch contact).

Opening the normally-closed safety contact(s) removes power

to the machine hazard. Upon operation, the actuator key is

withdrawn into the door handle housing … thus eliminating

the potential hazard represented by a protruding key.

AZ17…zrk Installation

Typical Applications

The low-profile ergonomically-designed door handle is ideal

for use on light- to medium-weight movable machine guards.

AZM170…zrk Installation

82


SERIES B25

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES

Compatible

Safety Interlock*

(order separately)

Series AZ17…zrk

(see Page 4)

Part Number

AZ17-B25-L-G1

AZ17-B25-L-G2

AZ17-B25-R-G1

AZ17-B25-R-G2

Description

Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard

T-grip for left-hand hinged guard

Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard

T-grip for right-hand hinged guard

*Note: The AZ17 or AZM170

Safety Interlock Switch

and the mounting plates

are not included in the

delivery and must be

ordered separately.

Please note the assembly

requires the interlock with

the latching (“r”) option.

Series AZM170…zrk

(see Page 44)

AZM170-B25-L-G1

AZM170-B25-L-G2

AZM170-B25-R-G1

AZM170-B25-R-G2

Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard

T-grip for left-hand hinged guard

Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard

T-grip for right-hand hinged guard

To order unit without

Star-grip or T-grip handle,

please change suffix to

G0. For example …

AZ17-B25-L-G0.

Series AZ17…zrk

Series AZM170…zrk

MP-B25*

Mounting plates for switch & handle assembly

3

Mounting Plates MP-B25

Order separately

Star-Grip

T-Grip

DIMENSIONS

AZ17…zrk Installation

AZM170…zrk Installation

83


SERIES ZSD

3-Position Hand-Held Enabling Device

Features & Benefits

• Redundant contacts ... allows use in up to safety control

category 4 systems.

• Auxiliary contact ... for status signalling.

• Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3 ...

enhances safety.

• 3-position (OFF-ON-OFF) design ... provides for machine

stop control when operator squeezes or releases actuator

from center “on” position.

• Rugged IP65 rating ... withstands harsh industrial

environments.

• Optional normally-open top-mounted pushbutton ...

enables machine jog/start control.

• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... to satisfy

enabling device requirements.

Description

The ZSD is a hand-held “dead man” switch with 3 operating

positions — OFF-ON-OFF. The machine/robot can be

operated in the “on” position. It provides safety based on

normal human behavior of either releasing or squeezing the

actuator in an emergency situation.

Operation

Machine/robot operation is only allowed when the enabling

device is held in the middle (“on”) position. Releasing the

switch (position 1) or squeezing the switch (position 3) shuts

down the equipment.

Typical Applications

Used in robotic cells and automated manufacturing systems

to provide operator safety during set-up, maintenance,

or troubleshooting.

SWITCHING DIAGRAM FOR ZSD5

Position 1 2 3

Normally open contact 1–2*

Normally open contact 3–4*

Auxiliary contact 5–6

Open: , Closed:

* Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3

Part Number

ZSD5

ZSD6

ZSD-H

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(INCLUDES M20 STRAIN RELIEF)

Description

3-Position Enabling Switch (OFF-ON-OFF)

3-Position Enabling Switch (but with

top-mounted pushbutton - 1NO contact)

Metal Holding Bracket

Note: For factory installed cable, add length in meters,

e.g. ZSD5-5m.

Use of a SCHMERSAL safety controller with cross short monitoring

is required (SCHMERSAL models SRB301ST-24 or SRB301SQ).

88


ZSD TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Temperature

Operating Humidity

Storage Temperature

Operating Frequency

Mechanical Life

Shock Operating Extremes 100m/s 2

Resistance Damage Limits 1000m/s 2

–25°C to +60°C (no freezing)

45% to 85% RH maximum

(no condensation)

–40°C to +80°C (no freezing)

1,200 operations/hour

Position 1•2•1: 1,000,000 minimum

Position 1•2•3•1: 100,000 minimum

Vibration Operating Extremes 5 to 55Hz, amplitude 0.5mm minimum

Resistance Damage Limits 16.7Hz, amplitude 1.5mm minimum

Terminal Pulling Strength 20N minimum

Terminal Screw Torque

0.5 to 0.6Nm

Degree of Protection

IP65

Weight

Approx. 240g (ZSD6)

Approx. 210g (ZSD5)

Conforming to Standards ANSI/RIA R 15.06 ISO 12100

EN ISO 13849-1 ISO 11161

EN 954-1 ISO 10218

IEC/EN 60947-5-1 EN 13850 (e-

IEC 60204-1

stop button)

Approvals

UL, CSA, BG, CE

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contact Resistance

100mΩ maximum

Between live & dead metal parts:

Insulation Resistance

100MΩ maximum (at 500VDC)

Between positive & negative live parts:

100MΩ minimum (at 500VDC)

Impulse Withstand

Voltage

Electrical Life

Recommended Wire Size

2.5kV

100,000 cycles (min.) @max. load

16 - 26 AWG

Recommended Cable .275 - .512 inch diameter

Conditional

Short Circuit Current 50A (250V)

Recommended Short 250V/10A fast-blow fuse (IEC 60127-1)

Circuit Protection

Contact Rating 2A @ 30V, 4A @ 125V

3

DIMENSIONS (mm)

46

ZSD5/6

86

174 9

54 58

ZSD-H

Note: Model with top-mounted pushbutton shown.

89


SERIES TFH

Safety Foot Switch

Features & Benefits

• Positive-Break Contacts ... assure circuit interruption upon

complete foot pedal actuation.

• Automatic latching following an emergency stop signal ...

meets EN ISO 13850, EN 13850 standard for E-Stop switches.

• Unique design with protective shield ... avoids unintentional

actuation due to falling debris or dropped items.

• Release modes ... only manually by pushing the button on the

top of the pedal.

• Heavy duty aluminum shield ... tolerates mechanical abuse

without damage.

• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements of

EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of EN 954-1.

Description

Extensive accident prevention research has shown that in the

event of pain/distress, the foot is frequently not removed

from the foot pedal that is enabling equipment operation.

Paradoxically, weight is often shifted forward and pressure on

the foot pedal is increased (rather than removed).

Recognizing this, the series TFH safety foot switch features

3-stage operation. It is designed to stop hazardous movements

in machinery whether released or fully-depressed in an

emergency situation.

Its positive-break, normally-closed contact provides a

significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven

contacts which can weld/stick shut. Their glass-fiber

reinforced pedal and aluminum protective shield make them

ideal for heavy-duty applications in hostile environments.

Typical Applications

The TFH foot switch is intended for use in machines or areas

where operation using the hands is not possible. Typical

applications are profile and tube bending machines, bar

turning machines, thread cutting, and wire drawing machines.

AVAILABLE MODELS

Part Number

Contacts

TFH232-11UEDR

1 NO & 1 NC

TFH232-22UEDR

2 NO & 2 NC

All Enclosures include M20 to 1/2" NPT metal conduit adapter

Operation

In the event of pain, the foot is frequently not removed from

the switching pedal, but paradoxically pressure is increased,

and the weight shifted forward. The solution to this problem

is provided by a 3-stage safety foot switch.

Position 1. The pedal is not actuated in the upper position.

→ Machine “ OFF ”

Signal Output

0ff

Position 1

(Pedal not

actuated)

Position 2. The operation circuit contact closes after

actuating the foot pedal (the pedal is in contact

with the tangible pressure-point stop).

→ Machine “ ON ”

On

Position 2

(Pedal depressed

to pressure point)

Position 3. The pressure point is overcome in the event of

danger or sensing pain, the circuit contact opens

and is automatically latched.

→ Machine “ Emergency Stop ”

Operation to position 3 requires manual reset using the

integral push button actuator

Optional safety controllers for E-Stop applications are

available. Please see SRB Safety Controllers starting on

page 320.

0ff

0ff

Position 3

(Pedal fully

depressed)

Release/Reset

(Pedal returns

to position 1)

90

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


SERIES TFH TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Enclosure

Aluminum (die casting)

Protecting Hood (shield) Aluminum (die casting)

Pedal

Glass-fiber reinforced

thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529

Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C

Mechanical life

> 1 million operations

Conformity to Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 EN ISO 13849-1

EN 13850 EN 954-1

BG-GS-ET-15 EN ISO 13850

UL/CSA

CE

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contact Rating 4 A / 230VAC 1 A / 24DC

Switching Action

Slow-action NC

Positive break contacts

Rated Insulation Voltage 500 V

Type Terminals

Screw terminals, 2.5 mm 2 max.

(including conductor ferrules)

Withstand Voltage

6 kV

Thermal test current 10 A

Max. fuse rating

6 A (slow-blow)

TFH SERIES DIMENSIONS (mm)

3

CONTACT DIAGRAMS

TFH232-11…

TFH232-22…

91


SERIES SEPK(G)

Description

Schmersal’s family of two-hand control consoles have an

ergonomic design that require the operator to use both hands

to initiate a control action. Thus they insure that the operator’s

hands are kept away from the hazardous area of a machine

during operation.

The units are designed such that simultaneous operation

(within 0.5 seconds) of both control buttons is required to

initiate the machine cycle. The control buttons must remain

actuated to complete the machine cycle.

Each is equipped with an integral E-stop mushroom

pushbutton to facilitate emergency stoppage.

Units are available with a wide choice of options and

accessories, such as adjustable stands, auxiliary control

buttons, foot pedals, special colors, etc. for optimizing safety

and functionality.

Typical Applications

Two-hand control consoles are used as protective devices in

setting up and operating single-stroke equipment, and other

applications where it is desired to keep both of the operator’s

hands safe from a hazardous area during machine operation.

Applications are typically found in the metal working, rubber,

plastics and chemical industries as well as in semi-automatic

assembly equipment.

92

2-Hand Control Consoles

(with light force actuators)

Features & Benefits

• Choice of console material … rugged Lexan or die-cast

aluminum.

• Optional control functions … consoles designed to

accept up to 8 additional control and signalling devices.

• Hinged console covers … facilitate easy wiring and

assembly.

• Ergonomically-designed shelf to support hands during

actuation (SEPG model) … minimizes stress.

• Protective safety hoods … protect against accidental

actuation of pushbuttons.

• Integral E-stop mushroom pushbutton … for easy

emergency stop control

• IP65 ingress protection rating … tolerates hostile, wet

environments.

• Meets EN574 standard … safety of machinery for twohand

control consoles.

• Available adjustable stands (optional) … to optimize user

comfort.

• Available optional accessories … e.g., safety controllers,

foot pedals, rollers, special paint finishes for application

flexibility.

• Custom units available … please consult factory.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

Model Number

SEPK02.0.4.0.22/95

SEPK02.0.L.22

SEPG05.3.4.0.22/95.E1

SEPG05.3.L.22

Description

Plastic (Lexan), hooded console with

one red, 38.5mm E-stop mushroom

button (1NO & 1NC contact) and two

light force (2.3 lbs.) black, 55mm

mushroom pushbutton actuators (each

with 1NO & 1NC contact)

Empty plastic (Lexan) hooded console

(gray) with 3 bore holes for actuators

Powder-coated (gray) aluminum

hooded console with one red, 38.5mm

E-stop mushroom button (1NO & 1NC

contacts) and two light force (2.3 lbs.)

black, 55mm mushroom pushbutton

actuators (each with 1NO & 1NC

contact)

Empty powder-coated (gray) aluminum

hooded console with 3 bore holes for

actuators

Note: Also available as custom control panels with up to 8 control

and/or signalling devices in the central portion of the console

(in addition to the E-stop actuator) and adjustable height floor

stands (with or without rollers). Please consult factory.

AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

SRB201ZH-24VDC Two-hand control safety controller

(Please see page 336 for details)

EDRR40RT

KDRRK40RT

EFR

EF303.1

ADP55.3SW

AF02

AF10

Metal E-stop actuator (SEPG)

Plastic E-Stop actuator (SEPK)

Spring element for E-stop

E-stop actuator contact block with

1NO & 1NC contact

Light force palm button

Control actuator contact block with

1NO contact

Control actuator contact block with

1NC contact


SERIES SEPK(G)

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Console Material

Console Color

Ingress Protection

Mechanical Life

Expectancy of

Contact Blocks

Temperature Range

Mushroom Button

Actuating Force

Lexan (SEPK02…)

Die-cast aluminum (SEPG05…)

RAL 7035, light gray (SEPK02…)

RAL 7004, signal gray (SEPG05…)

IP65

Type A Contacts:

5 million cycles (minimum)

Type B Contacts:

10 million cycles (minimum)

Type AF Contacts: -25°C to +60°C

Type EF Contacts: -25°C to +80°C

2.3 lbs. (SEPK02…)

2.3 lbs. (SEPG05… EI)

Conformity to Standards EN ISO 13849-1 EN 13850

EN 954-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1

CE IEC/EN 60947-5-5

UL, CSA EN 574

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Contact Blocks)

Contact Type

Specification

Rated Operating

Current (Ie)

6A, 250VAC (AC15)

3A, 24VDC (DC13)

Insulation Voltage (Ui) 500V@Test Voltage

of 2,500V

Short Circuit

Protection

Type AF

(Operating

Pushbuttons)

Wire Size 2 x 0.5 to 2.5mm 2

(2 x 20AWG to

13AWG)

Type EF

(E-stop Button)

8A, 250VAC (AC15)

5A, 24VDC (DC13)

440V@Test Voltage

of 2,500V

10A, Slow-blow 10A, Slow-blow

2 x 0.5 to 1.5mm 2

(2 x 20AWG to

15AWG)

3

DIMENSIONS SEPK

DIMENSIONS SEPG

93


Connection Cables

Ordering code breakdown:

(1)-(2)-(3)-(4)-(5)-(6)-(7)-(8)-(9)-(10)-(11)

Nr. Option Description

Cable

(1) A Connection Cable

S Connector without cable

Connection/Number of poles

(2) K Female coupling

3P 3 Pole

4P 4 Pole

5P 5 Pole

6P 6 Pole

7P 7 Pole

8P 8 Pole

8+1P 9 Pole

12P 12 Pole

Connector diameter/threading

(3) M12 M12

M18 M18

M23 M23

M8 M8

Connection type

(4) R Snap on

S Screw on

Connector head form

(5) G Straight

W Right angled

Nr. Option Description

Cable color

(7) X No cable

BK Black

OG Orange

GY Gray

Cable material

(8) X No cable

1 PVC

2 PUR

LED Signal lights

(9) X No LEDs

2LP 2 LED – PNP

Coding

(10) X Standard

A A-Coding

B B-Coding

Approvals

(11) 1 None

2 UL

3 CSA

4 CULUS

Cable length

(6) X No cable

2M 2m

2,5M 2,5m

3M 3m

5M 5m

10M 10m

Example:

S-K4P-M8-S-G-X-X-X-X-X-1

Connector without cable, 4 pole, M8 threading, screw on, straight connector.

94


EMERGENCY CABLE-PULL SWITCHES

SELECTION GUIDE

4

Switch

Series

Housing

Material

Maximum

Span

ZQ700 Thermoplastic 32.5 feet

ZQ900

Die-cast

zinc

165 feet

Contact

Configurations

1 NO & 1 NC

2 NC

1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 3 NC

2 NO & 2 NC

2 NC, 4NC

Rated

Catalog

Page

No 96

(Optional) 98

S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner 111

Installation accessories and installation instructions 106

95


SERIES ZQ700

Emergency Cable-Pull Switch

New!

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile

environments.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuit

interruption upon pulling of trip-wire.

• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled or

goes slack.

• Watertight design … meets up to IP67 environmental

requirements.

Continuous E-stop protection satisfying

EN ISO 13850 … for supported spans up to 32.5 feet (10m).

• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.

• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.

Description

The ZQ700 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop

control along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which

present hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. Unlike

E-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can be

actuated at any point along the “trip wire”.

The unit features a double-break contact block offering two contact

variations which change state when the cable is pulled or

goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if an operator falls

into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire.

The unit also features a position indicator for easier installation,

and a button reset.

The ZQ700 is capable of spanning lengths of up to 10 meters. Its

rugged, Thermoplastic housing and watertight design (up to

IP67) make it ideal in hostile environments.

Operation

When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s)

are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the

actuating shaft … resulting in machine stoppage.

If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC contact(s)

opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage.

The integral reset mechanism assures that the equipment

cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch reset has

been actuated.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

Part Number

Contacts

ZQ 700-11

1NO/1NC

ZQ 700-02

2NC

AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

STQ441-SC 5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated

STQ441-EB M10 eye bolt & hex nut

STQ441-CC Cable clamp

STQ441-TB Turnbuckle

STQ441-TH Thimble

STQ441-PU Pulley assembly (for “cable cornering”)

S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire tensioner, see page 111

For recommended installation instructions, please see page 106.

Typical Applications

The ZQ700 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stop

pushbuttons or achieving a continuous, immediately accessible

emergency stop … especially where space is limited. Typical

applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging

machinery, and transfer lines.

96

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


ZQ700 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Cover

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67

Maximum Supported 32.5 feet (10m)

Span

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Conformity to Standards CE EN 954-1

EN ISO 13850 UL, CSA

EN ISO 13849-1 TUV

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Fine silver

Contact Configuration Double-pole, double-break with

electrically-separated contact

bridges

Contact Rating 4A/230VAC 4A/24VDC

Switching Action

Snap-action, positive-break NC

contacts with wire pull

Short Circuit Protection 6A (Slow blow)

Rated Insulation Voltage 500VAC

Type Terminals

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible

stranded wire (2.5mm 2 )

DIMENSIONS

Cable length vs. temperature range

4

At 2 to 5 m distance, intermediate wire supports are

required, see accessories.

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

ZQ700-11

ZQ700-02

97


SERIES ZQ900

Emergency Cable-Pull Switch

New!

Features & Benefits

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile

environments.

• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuit

interruption upon pulling of trip-wire.

• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled or

goes slack.

• Integrated emergency-stop button (optional) … assures

complete emergency stop.

• Watertight design … meets up to IP67 environmental

requirements.

Continuous E-stop protection satisfying

EN ISO 13850 … for supported spans up to 165 feet (50m).

• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.

• Up to four contacts in a compact housing … available in

five contact configurations.

• Designed to meet the Performance Level requirements

of EN ISO 13849-1 and Safety Control Categories of

EN 954-1.

• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.

Description

The ZQ900 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop

control along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which

present hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. Unlike

E-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can be

actuated at any point along the “trip wire”.

The unit features a double-break contact block offering a choice

of five contact variations which change state when the cable is

pulled or goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if an

operator falls into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire.

In addition the unit features an optional integrated E-Stop

pushbutton, a position indicator for easier installation, a button

reset, three cable entries, and an optional signaling lamp.

The unit is capable of spanning lengths of up to 50 meters.

Its rugged, metal housing and watertight design (up to IP67)

make it ideal in hostile environments.

Operation

When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s)

are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the

actuating shaft … resulting in machine stoppage.

If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC

contact(s) opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage.

The integral reset mechanism assures that the equipment

cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch reset has

been actuated.

Typical Applications

The ZQ900 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stop

pushbuttons or achieving a continuous, immediately accessible

emergency stop … especially where space is limited. Typical

applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging

machinery, and transfer lines.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

Part Number

Contacts

ZQ 900-11

1NO/1NC

ZQ 900-02

2NC

ZQ 900-13

1NO/3NC

ZQ 900-22

2NO/2NC

ZQ 900-04

4NC

Note: Add -N for integral E-stop button

AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

PL-M20-24V 24V Pilot light kit

PL-M20-120V 120V Pilot light kit

STQ441-SC 5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated

STQ441-EB M10 eye bolt & hex nut

STQ441-CC Cable clamp

STQ441-TB Turnbuckle

STQ441-TH Thimble

STQ441-PU Pulley assembly (for “cable cornering”)

S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire tensioner, see page 111

For recommended installation instructions, please see page 106.

98

®

is a trademark of SCHMERSAL


ZQ900 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Die-cast zinc, enamel finish

Cover

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

cover

Degree of Protection IP67; -N version IP65

Maximum Supported 165 feet (50m)

Span

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Conformity to Standards CE EN 954-1

EN ISO 13850 UL, CSA

EN ISO 13849-1 TUV

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contacts

Fine silver

Contact Configuration Double-pole, double-break with

electrically-separated contact

bridges

Contact Rating 4A/230VAC 1A/24VDC

Switching Action

Snap-action, positive-break NC

contacts with wire pull

Short Circuit Protection 6A (Slow blow)

Rated Insulation Voltage 500VAC

Type Terminals

Screw terminals with self-lifting

clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible

stranded wire (2.5mm 2 )

-10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

T(°C)

DIMENSIONS

10

20

30

40

50

l (m)

Cable length vs. temperature range

4

At 5 m distance, intermediate wire supports are

required, see accessories.

SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS

ZQ900-11

ZQ900-02

ZQ900-04

ZQ900-22

ZQ900-13

99


Recommended Emergency Cable-Pull Switch Installation Instructions

ZQ700

ZQ900

ZS71

ZS80

Thimble Red PVC Eye bolt

coated (cable Guide)

cable

Thimble Thimble Eye bolt Thimble

(cable Guide)

Eye bolt

(End anchor)

Cable Clamps

(remove red PVC

coating from

clamping area)

Cable Clamps

(remove red PVC

coating from

clamping area)

Turnbuckle

tensioner

Cable Clamps

(remove red PVC

coating from

clamping area)

Cable Clamps

(remove red PVC

coating from

clamping area)

Spring

S900

Tensioner

Eye bolt

(cable Guide)

Red PVC

coated cable

Eye bolt

(cable Guide)

Eye bolt

(cable Guide)

Thimble

Eye bolt

(End anchor)

Spring

Cable Clamps

(remove red PVC

coating from

clamping area)

See page 126 for S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner

Consult factory for appropriate Spring. Tension force is

dependant on switch used.

Part # S900 - Tensioner

Replaces turnbuckle & cable clamps

Part # STQ 441 SS - Steel Spring

For lateral actuation application and extreme

temperature environments

106


S900

Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner

Features & Benefits

• Smooth adjustment … reduces adjustment effort.

• Only one tool required … simplifies installation.

• Anti-slip design … reduces need for readjustment.

• Ergonomic … risk of injury is reduced.

• Time-saving … cost of ownership is reduced.

• Stainless steel components … tolerates the most hostile

environments.

AVAILABLE MODEL

Model Number

S900

S900-SH

Cable Pull Wire Tensioner

Shackle

Description

Description

The S900 is a unique wire tensioning device which simplifies

the installation and adjustment of cable pull switches.

Conventional systems are usually time consuming and

difficult to install and adjust, but not with the S900.

The S900 is an all-in-one unit that replaces the complicated

turnbuckle assembly, with its thimbles and multiple wire

clamps, and does not require the cable to be stripped to be

secured.

The S900 requires only a single tool to secure the wire and

adjust the tension. Its “anti-slip” design minimizes the need for

readjustments.

The unit features a “C” hook which easily slips onto the ring of

a cable-pull switch. Should the switch need to be replaced,

the S900 can be easily removed from the switch by releasing

the tension.

DIMENSIONS

Note: The cable-pull switch is purchased separately.

S900-SH shackle is required to utilize with

Schmersal ZS71 and ZS80 cable-pull switches.

4

111


112

Safer

by

Design


NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORS

Sensor

Series

SELECTION GUIDE

Approximate

Envelope

Dimensions

Operating

Voltage

BNS250 1.0" × 1.4" × 0.5" 24VDC

BNS260 1.0" × 1.4" × 0.5" 24VDC

Contact

Configuration(s)

1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

2 NC

3 NC

Catalog

Page

No.

1 NO & 1 NC

BNS33 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.5"

24VAC/DC

120VAC/DC

1 NO & 2 NC

2 NC

118

3 NC

BNS33S 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.625"

24VDC

100VAC/DC

1 NO & 2 NC 122

1 NO & 1 NC

BNS36 3.5" × 1.0" × 0.5" 24VDC 1 NO & 2 NC

2NC, 3NC

124

BNS303 1.18" Dia × 1.74" 100VAC/DC

1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

126

BNS30 & BNS300 1.18" Dia × 3.07" 24VDC 1 NC

128

BNS333 4.5" × 1.7" × 1.7" 24VDC 1 NC 130

BNS16 1.25" × 2" × 3" 100VAC/DC

1 NO & 2 NC

2 NC

132

1 NO & 1 NC

134

BNS-B20 NA 24VDC 1 NO & 1 NC 136

CSS 180 0.7" Dia × 3.6" 24VDC 2 PNP 138

CSS 34 1" × 4" × 1" 24VDC 2 PNP 140

CSS 30S 1.18" Dia × 3.5" 24VDC 2 PNP 142

CSS 16 1.25" × 2" × 3" 24VDC 2 PNP 144

Coded-Magnet Sensor Compatible Safety Controllers

147

114

116

5

113


SERIES BNS250

Coded-Magnet Sensors

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy

installation and provide visual indication of switch status.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category

1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate

Schmersal safety controllers.

Description

The Series BNS250 coded-magnet sensors are designed for

use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence

of their matched magnetic field array.

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67

(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design

prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded

magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features a 1-

meter long prewired pigtail.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS250 is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications

include food processing equipment, chemical processing

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,

and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Please order BPS250 magnet separately)

Contact

Part Number

Description

Configuration*

BNS250-11z

BNS250-12z

BNS250-12z-2187

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS250 coded-magnet

actuator.

*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

!

1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

BNS250-11zG 1 NO & 1 NC

BNS250-12zG

BNS250-11zG-2205

1 NO & 2 NC

1 NO & 1 NC

Multiple reed switch

assembly with 1-meter

prewired pigtail

Multiple reed switch

assembly with 1 meter

prewired pigtail and built-in

LED display

Multiple reed switch assembly

with 5 meter pigtail (side entry)

and built-in LED display

BPS250 N/A Coded-magnet actuator

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

114


BNS250 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 4mm (0.16")

“Off”: 14mm (0.55")

Degree of Protection IP67

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance

30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1

UL EN 954-1

CSA BG-GS-ET-14

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC

Maximum Continuous 100 mA (BNS250-11z/12z)

Current Rating

10 mA (BNS250-11zG/12zG)

Maximum Switching

1W (BNS250-11z/12z)

Capacity (Power Rating) 240mW (BNS250-11zG/12zG)

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail

*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on

request. Please consult factory.

DIMENSIONS

25

.98

19

.75

33

1.30

22

.87

13

5.1

ø4,5

.18

13

.51

8,7

.34

33

1.30

22

.87

13

.51

8,7

.34

1000

39.37

25

.98

19

.75

ø4,5

.18

mm

inch

Note: BNS250 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.

WIRING DETAILS

5

BNS250-11z

BNS250-12z

BNS250-11zG

BNS250-12zG

13

(black)

14

(blue)

13

(black)

14

(blue)

13

(black)

14

(blue)

13

(black)

14

(blue)

21

(white)

22

(brown)

21

(white)

C

(brown)

21

(white)

22

(brown)

21

(white)

C

(brown)

Contacts shown with gate closed

MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

BNS250-12z-2187

115


SERIES BNS260

Coded-Magnet Sensors

Description

The Series BNS260 coded-magnet sensors are designed

for use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence

of their matched magnetic field array.

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67

(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design

prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly

coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features

a 1-meter long prewired pigtail or an available connector.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS260 is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications

include food processing equipment, chemical processing

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,

and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.

Note: See page 94 for appropriate M8 connector cables.

4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-on

connector.

6 pole models (with signalling contact) accept only a

snap-on connector.

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy

installation and provide visual indication of switch status.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with

Series AES safety controllers.

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category

1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate

Schmersal safety controllers.

AVAILABLE MODELS

(Actuator ordered separately)

Part Number Contacts Connection

BNS260-02Z-* 2 NC prewired

BNS260-02ZG-* 2 NC

1 meter cable

BNS260-02Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 4 pole

BNS260-02ZG-ST-* 2 NC

connector

BNS260-11Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired

BNS260-11ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable

BNS260-11Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 4 pole

BNS260-11ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector

With 1 NC signalling contact

BNS260-02/01Z-* 2 NC prewired

BNS260-02/01ZG-* 2 NC

1 meter cable

BNS260-02/01Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 6 pole

BNS260-02/01ZG-ST-* 2 NC

connector

BNS260-11/01Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired

BNS260-11/01ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable

BNS260-11/01Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 6 pole

BNS260-11/01ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector

*Please indicate hinge direction: -L (left) or -R (right)

CODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES

Model Number

BPS260-1

BPS260-2

BNS260

Description

Standard Actuator

Actuator for 90° operation

Spacer for mounting reed switch or

magnet on ferrous material

Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

116

!

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.


BNS260 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")

“Off”: 15mm (0.6")

Degree of Protection IP67

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance

30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE EN 954-1

cUL

BG-GS-ET-14

EN ISO 13849-1

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Operating Voltage 75VDC

24VDC for LED versions

Maximum Continuous 400 mA without LED

Current Rating

10 mA with LED

Maximum Switching

10va without LED

240mW with LED

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M8

4 or 6 pin connector (ST)

*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on

request. Please consult factory.

DIMENSIONS

BNS260

BPS260

mm

Note: BNS260 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.

WIRING DETAILS (Contact configuration shown in presence of BPS260 Coded-magnet actuator)

BNS260-02z(G)

BNS260-02/01z(G) BNS260-11z(G) BNS260-11/01z(G)

5

Contacts shown with gate closed. Color configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary.

QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMS

MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

BNS260 4-Pole

BNS260 6-Pole

117


SERIES BNS33

Coded-Magnet Sensors

Description

The Series BNS33 coded-magnet sensors are designed for

use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence

of their matched magnetic field array.

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67

(submersible) standards (IP69K for BNS33S). Their tamperresistant

design prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or

improperly coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module

features an optional built-in LED display of switch status, and

a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to assure sealing integrity.

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy

installations and provide visual indication of switch status.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or

Category 1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with

appropriate Schmersal safety controllers.

• Optional high-strength field coded-magnets …

extends sensing range to 10mm.

• Units available with M8 quick-connect.

(Please consult factory.)

• Available stainless steel housing (BNS33S) … ideal

for the food industry (see page 122).

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS33 is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments or where space is

limited. Typical applications include food processing

equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking

machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm

rest position sensing.

Required Safety

Controller.

*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

!

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

118


BNS33 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

Part Number

BNS33-11z**

BNS33-12z***

BNS33-02z-2187**

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Please order BPS33 or BPS33-2326 magnet separately)

Contact

Configuration*

1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

2 NC

Maximum

Contact Rating

100VAC/DC

(400mA)

100VAC/DC

(250mA)

Description

Multiple reed switch

assembly with 1-meter

prewired pigtail

ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

BPS33

Coded-magnet actuator

(5mm sensing distance)

BPS33-2326

Coded-magnet actuator

(10mm sensing distance)

BN31/33

Shim plate for mounting reed switch

assembly on ferrous material

Note: See page 94 for M8, 4 pin connector cables

BNS33-11zG**

BNS33-12zG***

BNS33-02zG-2187**

1 NO & 1 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

2 NC

24VDC

(10mA)

Multiple reed switch

assembly with 1-meter

prewired pigtail and

built-in LED display

Coded Magnet

Sensor

BNS33-12z-2187**

1 NO & 2 NC

100VAC/DC

(250mA)

Multiple reed switch

assembly with 1-meter

prewired pigtail

BNS33-11z-ST**

1NO & 1NC

60VAC/DC

(400mA)

BNS33-11zG-ST**

BNS33-12z-ST***

1NO & 1NC

1NO & 2NC

24VDC

(10mA)

60VAC/DC

(400mA)

Multiple reed switch

assembly with M8x1

quick-connect

Multiple Reed Switch Assembly

Safety Controller

Coded-Magnet Sensor and

Safety Controller sold separately.

BNS33-12zG-ST***

1NO & 2NC

24VDC

(10mA)

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33 coded-magnet actuator.

**These models feature isolated contacts.

***These models feature C-form contacts.

5

Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on request.

Please consult factory.

Note: SPEZ-2237 for sliding doors is available for BNS33-11z and -11zG only.

Contact factory for more information.

119


BNS33 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")

“Off”: 15mm (0.6")

“On”: 8mm (0.3") (For BNS33S only)

“Off”: 18mm (0.7") (For BNS33S only)

Degree of Protection IP67 (BNS33S: IP69k)

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F (+178°F for BNS33S)

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1

UL EN 954-1

CSA

BG-GS-ET-14

IEC 529/EN60529

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For electrical ratings see page 139

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.

M8x1 quick-connect for versions

with “ST” suffix

*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.

BPS33 MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

120


BNS33 TECHNICAL DATA

DIMENSIONS

Note: 27mm width and

14.5mm depth for

BNS33S/BPS33S

M8

25

0.98

7

0.28

3,5

0.14

88

3.47

78

3.07

0,5

.02

ø5

.02 DIA

18,5

.073

BNS33 with Quick-

Connect Terminal

4,5

0.18

3

.012

13

0.51

Note: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.

WIRING DETAILS

Quick-Connect for

BNS33-11 units

5

2 3

1 4

Pins 1-2 are Normally-closed

Pins 3-4 are Normally-open

Quick-Connect for

BNS33-12 units

BNS33-02zG-2187

2 3

1 4

Pin 1: Common

Pins 2 & 4 are Normally-closed

Pin 3 is Normally-open

Contacts shown with gate closed

121


SERIES BNS33S

Stainless Steel Coded-Magnet Sensors

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy

installations and provide visual indication of switch status.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or

Category 1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with

appropriate Schmersal safety controllers.

• Stainless steel housing … ideal for the food industry.

Description

The Series BNS33S coded-magnet sensor is designed for

use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence

of their matched magnetic field array.

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP69K

standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing

with a simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In

addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED

display of switch status, and a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to

assure sealing integrity.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

Part Number

BNS33S-12z**

BNS33S-12zG**

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Please order BPS33S magnet separately)

Contact

Configuration*

1 NO & 2 NC

1 NO & 2 NC

Maximum

Contact

Rating

100VAC/DC

(250mA)

24VDC

(10mA)

BPS33S N/A N/A

Description

Multiple reed

switch assembly

with 1-meter

prewired pigtail

and stainless

steel enclosure

Stainless steel

coded-magnet

actuator

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33S coded-magnet actuator.

**These models feature isolated contacts.

Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on

request. Please consult factory.

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS33S is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments or where space is

limited. Typical applications include food processing

equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking

machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm

rest position sensing.

*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

!

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

122


BNS33S TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Type V4A (316L) stainless steel

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 8mm (0.3")

“Off”: 18mm (0.7")

Degree of Protection IP69k

Operating Temperature –13°F to +178°F

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE EN 954-1

IEC 529/EN60529 BG-GS-ET-14

EN ISO 13849-1

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For electrical ratings see page

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.

*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.

DIMENSIONS

BPS33S

BNS33S

Note: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.

WIRING DETAILS

BNS33S MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

5

Contacts shown with gate closed

123


SERIES BNS36

Coded-Magnet Sensors

Description

The Series BNS36 coded-magnet sensors are designed

for use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence

of their matched magnetic field array.

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67

(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design

prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly

coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an

optional built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meter

long prewired pigtail or an available connector.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS36 is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications

include food processing equipment, chemical processing

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,

and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.

Note: See page 94 for appropriate M8 connector cables.

4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-on

connector.

6 pole models (with signalling output) accept only a

snap-on connector.

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy

installation and provide visual indication of switch status.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with

Series AES safety controllers.

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category

1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate

Schmersal safety controllers.

AVAILABLE MODELS

(Actuator ordered separately)

Part Number Contacts Connection

BNS36-02Z-* 2 NC prewired

BNS36-02ZG-* 2 NC

1 meter cable

BNS36-02Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 4 pole

BNS36-02ZG-ST-* 2 NC

connector

BNS36-11Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired

BNS36-11ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable

BNS36-11Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 4 pole

BNS36-11ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector

With 1 NC signalling contact

BNS36-02/01Z-* 2 NC prewired

BNS36-02/01ZG-* 2 NC

1 meter cable

BNS36-02/01Z-ST-* 2 NC M8, 6 pole

BNS36-02/01ZG-ST-* 2 NC

connector

BNS36-11/01Z-* 1 NO & 1 NC prewired

BNS36-11/01ZG-* 1 NO & 1 NC 1 meter cable

BNS36-11/01Z-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC M8, 6 pole

BNS36-11/01ZG-ST-* 1 NO & 1 NC connector

*Please indicate hinge direction: -L (left) or -R (right)

CODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES

Model Number

BPS36-1

BPS36-2

BNS36

Description

Standard Actuator

Actuator for 90° operation

Spacer for mounting reed switch or

magnet on ferrous material

Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

124

!

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.


BNS36 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 7mm

“Off”: 17mm

Degree of Protection IP67

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance

30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE EN 954-1

BG-GS-ET14 UL

EN ISO 13849-1 CSA

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Operating Voltage 75V DC

24VDC for LED versions

Maximum Continuous 400 mA without LED

Current Rating

10 mA with LED

Maximum Switching

10va without LED

240mW with LED

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY* 0.25mm 2

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M8

4 or 6 pin connector (ST)

*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on

request. Please consult factory.

DIMENSIONS

BNS36

BPS36

BNS36 Spacer

Note: BNS36 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.

WIRING DETAILS (Contact configuration shown in presence of BPS36 Coded-magnet actuator)

BNS36-02z(G)

BNS36-02/01z(G) BNS36-11z(G) BNS36-11/01z(G)

5

Contacts shown with gate closed. Color configuration shown for cabled versions, connector color codes may vary.

QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMS

MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

BNS36 4-Pole

BNS36 6-Pole

125


SERIES BNS303

Coded-Magnet Sensors

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category

1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate

Schmersal safety controllers.

Description

The Series BNS303 coded-magnet sensors are designed for

use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence

of their matched magnetic field array.

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67

(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design

prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded

magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an

integral built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meter

long prewired pigtail.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)

Part Number

Contact

Configuration*

Description

BNS303-11z 1 NO & 1 NC

Multiple reed switch

(100VAC/DC/400mA)

BNS303-12z 1 NO & 2 NC

assembly with 1-meter

prewired pigtail

BNS303-11zG 1 NO & 1 NC

Multiple reed switch

(24VDC/10mA) assembly

with 1-meter prewired

BNS303-12zG 1 NO & 2 NC pigtail and built-in LED

display

BPS300

N/A

Coded-magnet actuator

(front mount)

BPS303**

N/A

Coded-magnet actuator

(rear mount)

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS303 codedmagnet

actuator.

**Available with stainless-steel outer jackets. Please consult factory.

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS303 is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications

include food processing equipment, chemical processing

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,

and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.

*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

BPS300 Actuator

BPS303 Actuator**

!

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

126


BNS303 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Switching Distance, “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")

“Off”: 15mm (0.6")

“On”: 8 mm ¸

“Off”: 18mm

˝Suffix 2211 only

˛

Degree of Protection IP67

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1

UL EN 954-1

CSA BG-GS-ET-14

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC (with LED)

100VAC/DC (without LED)

Maximum Continuous 10mA (with LED)

Current Rating

400mA (without LED)

Maximum Switching

10VA

Capacity (Power Rating)

Type Connection* 1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm 2

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail

*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on

request. Please consult factory.

DIMENSIONS

BPS300

6

.24

36

1.42

mm

inch

ø 4,5

.18

2

.08

90°

ø2

.08

14

.55

x 1,5

.06

15

.59

30

1.18

M 30

1.20

2

.08

ø2

.08

44

1.74

1000

39.37

ø30

1.18

14

.55

ø 37

1.46

5

15

.59

BPS303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)

Note: BNS303 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.

WIRING DETAILS

MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

BNS303-11z

13

(black)

21

(white)

14

(blue)

22

(brown)

13

(black)

21

(white)

BNS303-11zG

14

(blue)

22

(brown)

22

(black)

32

(white)

BNS303-12z

14

(blue)

C

(brown)

BNS303-12zG

13

(black)

21

(white)

14

(blue)

C

(brown)

Contacts shown with gate closed

127


SERIES BNS30 & BNS300

Coded-Magnet Sensor with

Integral Safety Control Module

Description

The Series BNS30 and BNS300 coded-magnet sensors are

designed for use as a safety interlock switch on movable

machine guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set

consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet

actuator. The reed switches, wired in series, will only close in

the presence of their matched magnetic field array.

In addition, the Series features an integral monitoring and

control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array

(satisfying EN ISO 13849-1, PL c/Category 1 without use of an

ancillary safety relay module).

Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67

(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design

prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded

magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an

integral LED display of switch status and a 1-meter long

prewired pigtail.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy

installations and provide visual indication of switch status.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Integral reed switch monitoring & control module…

detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies PL c per

EN ISO 13849-1, or Safety Category 1 per EN 954-1.

• Available in metal (BNS30) or plastic (BNS300)

housings … for application versatility.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)

Contact

Part Number

Configuration*

Description

BNS30-01ZG**

and

BNS300-01zG**

BPS300

BPS303***

1 NC

N/A

N/A

Multiple reed switch

(24VDC/30mA) assembly

with 1-meter prewired pigtail

and built-in LED display

Coded-magnet actuator

(front mount)

Coded-magnet actuator

(rear mount)

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303

coded-magnet actuator.

**Important Note: The BNS30 and BNS300 are 4-wire sensors

designed to satisfy PL c per EN ISO 13849-1,

or control Category 1 per EN 954-1. They are

not designed for use with a separate safety

controller.

***Available with stainless-steel outer jacket. Please consult

factory

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications

include food processing equipment, chemical processing

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,

and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.

BPS300 Actuator

BPS303 Actuator***

128


BNS300 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic (BNS300)

Brass, nickel-plated (BNS30)

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")

“Off”: 15mm (0.6")

Degree of Protection IP67

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE EN ISO 13849-1

UL EN954-1

CSA BG-GS-ET-14

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Supply Voltage

Maximum Continuous

Current Rating

Maximum Switching

Capacity (Power Rating)

Type Connection*

24VDC

30mA

Voltage: 250VAC

Current: 3A (750VA)

1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2

(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail

*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available

on request. Also available with M12x1 quick-connect. Please

consult factory.

DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS

6

.24

36

1.42

2

.08

BPS300

ø2

.08

M 30

1.20

x 1.5

.06

90°

ø 4,5

.18

14

.55

15

.59

30

1.18

78

3.07

1000

40

2

.08

ø2

.08

mm

inch

BN 24 VDC

BK

BK

BU 30 mA

BNS300-01-zG

L+

L-

ø30

1.18

15

.59

14

.55

ø 37

1.46

BPS303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)

5

Note: BNS300 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.

MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

129


SERIES BNS333

Coded-Magnet Sensors with

Integral Safety Control Module

Features & Benefits

Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy

installation and provide visual indication of switch status.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Integral reed switch monitoring/control module …

detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies PL c per

EN ISO 13849-1, or control Category 1 per EN 954-1.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)

Contact

Part Number

Configuration*

Description

Description

The Series BNS333 coded-magnet sensors are designed for

use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine

guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a

multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The

reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence

of their matched magnetic field array.

In addition, the BNS333 features an integral monitoring and

control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array

(satisfying EN ISO 13849-1, PL c /Category 1 without use of an

ancillary safety circuit monitoring module).

Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with a

simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In

addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED

display of switch status.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

BNS333-01YU** 1 NC

Multiple reed switch(24VAC/

DC/40mA) assembly with

integral switch monitoring

and control module.

Actuation from rear (“U”)

BNS333-01YD**

Same as above but

actuation from front

(“D”)

BNS333-01YL**

Same as above but

actuation from left (“L”)

BNS333-01YR**

Same as above but

actuation from right (“R”)

BNS333-01YV**

Same as above but

actuation from top (“V”)

BPS300

N/A

Coded-magnet actuator

(front mount)

BPS303***

N/A

Coded-magnet actuator

(rear mount)

*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303

coded-magnet actuator.

**The BNS333 is a 4-wire sensor designed to satisfy PL c per

EN ISO 13849-1, or control Category 1 per EN 954-1. It is not

designed for use with a separate safety controller.

***Available with stainless steel outer jacket. Please consult

factory.

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS333 is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications

include food processing equipment, chemical processing

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,

and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.

BPS300 Actuator

BPS303 Actuator***

130


BNS333 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 4mm (0.16")

“Off”: 14mm (0.55")

Degree of Protection IP65

Operating Temperature –13°F to +158°F

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards CE

EN ISO 13849-1

EN 954-1

BG-GS-ET-14

*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The

proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Operating Voltage 24VDC

Maximum Continuous 40mA

Current Rating

Maximum Switching

Voltage: 250VAC

Capacity (Power Rating) Current: 5A

(1,250VA)

Type Connection

Screw terminals

DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS

40

1.57

40

1.57

2

.08

BPS300

ø2

.08

5,3

.49

112

4.40

45

1.77

90°

ø 4,5

.18

14

.55

15

.59

30

1.18

2

.08

14

.55

ø2

.08

60

2.36

7,3

.29

ø30

1.18

15

.59

ø 37

1.46

BPS 303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)

5

30

1.18

M20

34,3

1.35

mm

inch

1

2

3

4

24 VDC

40 mA

BNS333-01y

L+

L-

MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE

Actuating directions

131


SERIES BNS16

Coded-Magnet Sensors

Features & Benefits

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets.

• Satisfy PL c, PL d, or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category

1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate

Schmersal safety controllers.

• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand

mechanical abuse.

• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most

industrial environments.

• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact design

• Same mounting as Series AZ16 … ideal alternative in

wet, dirty environments.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

(Actuator ordered separately)

Description

The Series BNS16 coded-magnet sensors are designed for

use as a safety interlock on movable machine guards. Each

sensor set consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a

coded-magnet actuator. The sensor outputs will only change

state in the presence of their matched magnetic field array.

Both switch and magnet assembly are sealed to IP67

(submersible) standards. The unit features the same mounting

dimensions as our popular Series AZ16 keyed safety interlock

switches ... providing an attractive alternative in applications

characterized by alignment problems and/or harsh

environments.

Operation

The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary

portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly

mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When

the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns

with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the

guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not

properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor

output will remain “off.”

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact BNS16 is ideal for use on movable

machine guards in hostile environments or where space is

limited. Typical applications include food processing

equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking

machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm

rest position sensing.

Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

Part Number

BNS16 - 12ZD

BNS16 - 12ZU

BNS16 - 12ZV

BNS16 - 12ZR

BNS16 - 12ZL

BNS16 - 12ZLR

BPS16

Actuator Plane

Front cover

Back

Top

Right

Left

Dual actuation - both Left and Right

(2) BPS16 actuators required

Coded-magnet actuator

Actuating Planes

!

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

132


BNS16 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 8mm (0.315")

“Off”: 18mm (0.700")

Maximum Switching 5H (in combination with Series AES

Frequency

safety controller)

Degree of Protection IP67 per IEC 60529

Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C (–13°F to +158°F)

Operating Principle Magnetic

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Vibration Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm

Conformity to Standards EN 60347-5-3 EN ISO 13849-1

CE EN 954-1

UL

BG-GS-ET-14

CSA

*When no ferromagnetic material is present in vicinity of the sensor

or actuator.

DIMENSIONS

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Contact Rating* 100VAC/DC

Maximum Continuous 0.4A

Current Rating

Maximum Switching

10VA

Capacity (Power Rating)

Type Connection

3 removable cable entries

(M20x1.5) give access to screw

terminals with self-lifting clamps

for up to 13AWG (2.5mm 2 )

flexible stranded wire.

*Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed

by means of a suitable circuit.

AXIAL TOLERANCE

5

WIRING DETAILS

1 NO

2 NC

BNS16-11ZLR with actuation to right and left

surfaces. Requires two actuators.

Contacts shown with gate closed

133


SERIES BNS-B20

Coded-Magnet Sensor with

Safety Door Handle

Features & Benefits

• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple

magnets

• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability

in the most hostile environments.

• Dual-function latch & sensor … integral magnetic holding

latch (with force of 100N).

• Application flexibility … 3-contact design compatible with

35mm, 40mm, and 45mm aluminum profiles

• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact

design.

• Satisfy PL c , PL d , or PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Category

1, 3, or 4 to EN 954-1 … when used with appropriate

Schmersal safety controllers.

• Easy-to-install … optional M12 x 1 quick disconnect &

LED status indicator in NC circuit

• Application diversity … suitable for hinged & sliding

guards, available for left- or right-hand doors/guards.

• Integral LED … displays switch status (non-LED models

also available).

Description

The Series BNS-B20 is designed for use as a combination

door handle and safety interlock switch for use on light to

medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each

unit consists of a door handle assembly equipped with two

multiple reed switch arrays and coded magnet actuators. In

addition, the unit features two latching magnets that attract

pole pieces in the sensor unit—providing a holding force of

approximately 100 Newtons.

The reed switches will only close in the presence of their

matched magnetic field array … thus enabling machine

operation. Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed

to IP67 standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents

bypassing with simple magnets. The unit also features an

LED display of switch status and an optional M12x1 quickconnect

for ease of wiring and installation.

Operation

The unit consists of two components … the door handle unit

and the sensor unit. The sensor unit is typically mounted to

the stationary portion of the guard structure, with the codedmagnet/handle

assembly mounted to the movable element of

the machine guard.

When the guard is closed, the matched magnetic fields align

with the reed switch arrays, closing the switches and enabling

machine operation. When the guard is open, or the magnetic

fields are not properly aligned with their reed switch arrays,

the sensor output will remain “off.”

Typical Applications

The sealed low-profile, ergonomic door handle system is ideal

for use on movable machine guards in hostile environments.

The absence of protruding elements eliminate/reduce risk of

injury and unintentional opening of the guard. Typical applications

include food processing equipment, chemical processing

equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,

and printing equipment.

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES*

(Please order sensor, actuator-door handle unit and

optional connector separately)

Part Number Description Termination

BNS-B20-12ZG-L

BNS-B20-12ZG-R

BNS-B20-12ZG-H

BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-L

BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-R

BNS-B20-B-01

Sensor unit for left-hand

hinged door

Sensor unit for right-hand

hinged door

Sensor unit for both rightand

left-hand hinged door

Sensor unit for left-hand

hinged door

Sensor unit for right-hand

hinged door

Actuator-door handle unit

Note: Sensor unit is also available for ASI Safety-at-Work bus

systems. Please add suffix “-AS” to sensor part number.

** 3, 5, and 10 meter cable lengths available on request;

add suffix “-XXm”

1 meter of

bottom-mounted

cable**

1 meter of

rear-mounted

cable**

Bottom-mounted

M12 conncetor

(M12x1, 8-pin)

see page 96

N/A

*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for

use in safety applications only when used with

an electrically compatible safety controller or

safety PLC. (For recommended compatible

SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller,

see selection chart on Page 147.)

!

USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY

DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.

136


SERIES BNS-B20 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic

Operating Principle Magnetic

Maximum Sensing Gap

(Sar) 22mm

(Sao) 0mm

Protection Class

IP67

Ambient Operating –25°C to +70°C

Temperature

Maximum Storage –25°C to +70°C

Temperature

Switching Frequency 5 Hz

Resistance to Shock 30g/11ms

Resistance to Vibration 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Max. door/guard weight Hinged guard: 5Kg

Sliding guard: 3Kg

Conformity to Standards IEC 60947-5-3 EN ISO 13849-1

BG-GS-ET-14 EN 954-1

UL

CE

CSA

Maximum Latching Force Approx. 100N (22 lbs.)

Safety Control Category Up to PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or

Control Category 4 per EN 954-1 when

used with appropriate SCHMERSAL

Series AES safety controller

Compatible Extrusion 35mm, 40mm, 45mm

Frames

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Switching Voltage 24 VDC

Maximum Switching Current 10mA

Maximum Switching Capacity 240mW

Indication of Switching LED (Illuminated when guard

Condition

is closed)

Termination M12x1 or cable (LiYY 6 x 0.25mm 2 )

Contact Configuration 1 N.O. & 2 N.C.

(LED in N.C. circuit)

Note: Available in “ASI Safety-at-Work” configuration.

WIRING DETAILS

Contacts shown

with gate closed

DIMENSIONS

PIN configuration M12, 8 pins

Note: Loads with high switch-on or switch-off voltage

spikes must be suppressed by an appropriate

protective circuit.

5

137


SERIES CSS 180

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile

environments.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e

per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1.

*See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

AVAILABLE CSS180 MODELS

Description

The CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is

designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring

the position of movable safety guards. In this application

the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,

sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions

according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M

(self-monitoring).

Operation

The CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are a

matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the

sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant

frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The

sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to

the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard

by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the

monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 180 Safety

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the

Safety Performance Level/control category (PL e per EN ISO

13849-1, control category 4 per EN 954-1).

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable

machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a

machine is required, and/or where hostile environments

exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile

machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling

systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,

and woodworking machinery.

Part Number

CSS-8-180-2P-E-L

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L

CSS-8-180-2P-E-LST

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LST

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-LST

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LST

Description

End or single device with pre-wired

cable

End or single device with diagnostic

output, pre-wired cable

Series device with double pre-wired

cables

Series device with diagnostic output,

pre-wired cables

End or single device, pre-wired cable

with M12x1 4 pole connection

End or single device with diagnostic

output, pre-wired cable with M12x1 5

pole connection

Series device, two pre-wired cables

with M12x1 4 pole connections

Series device with diagnostic output,

two pre-wired cables with M12x1 8

pole connections

ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

CST-180-1

Actuator

CST-180-2

Actuator

CSA-M-1

Magnetic latch

H-18 Mounting clamp

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL

safety control modules.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.

138


SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67

Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)

7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Hysteresis

≤ 0.5mm

Repeatability

≤ 0.2mm

Response Time

≤ 30ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-3 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 1.0A

No Load Current 0.05A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output Current 0.5A per output

Safety Output Max. 0.5V

Voltage Drop

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated operating

Operating Voltage voltage

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or

Cable 7x0.25mm 2

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see

page 182 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.

5

139


SERIES CSS 34

Description

The CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed for

application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the position

of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor

monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removable

guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 34 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions according to

EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring).

The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matched

pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excites

the actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the reads

back the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuator

frequency and its distance to the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard by

the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to

250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoring

of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 34 Safety Sensors can

be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance

level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, control category

4 per EN 954-1).

The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback option

that control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need for

a downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restart

interlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton with

edge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automatic

reset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or

end devices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors

to replace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system,

comprising the sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch,

meets the requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control

Category 4 per EN954-1, provided that positive guided contactors/relays

are used.

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable machine

guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machine is required,

and/or where hostile environments exist. Typical applications

include printing machinery, textile machinery, paper converting

equipment, material handling systems, packaging

140

machinery, chemical processing equipment, and woodworking

machinery.

Pulse-Echo Based Compact

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety of

mounting options.

• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile

environments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and reset

functions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of PL e per

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1, and

may remove need for safety control module. *See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easy

and accurate alignment of sensor and actuator.

AVAILABLE MODELS

(Actuators Ordered Separately)

Model Number

Standard Version

Description

CSS12-34-VDML*

CSS12-34-VDMST*

CSS14-34-SDML*

CSS14-34-SDMST*

F0

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic output

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Integrated Feedback, without edge

detection, auto-reset

CSS12-34F0-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output,

M12 Cable connector

CSS14-34F0-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

F1

Integrated Feedback, with edge

detection of reset button, manual reset

CSS12-34F1-VDMST Top Actuating surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

CSS14-34F1-SDMST Side Actuation surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Note: See page 94 for M12, 9 pin connector cables.

Sensors are also available with a serial diagnostic output for

use with various field bus protocols network. Please see page

204 for SD Gateways.

Model Number

CST34-S-1

CST34-V-1

AVAILABLE ACTUATORS

Side surface actuator

Top surface actuator

Description

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL

safety control modules.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.


SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP65 and IP67

Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal

10-15mm (Maximum)

Side (S) 14mm Nominal

12-17mm (Maximum)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Hysteresis

1mm

Repeatability

≤ 0.5mm

Response Time

≤ 30ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-3 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 0.6A

No Load Current 0.1A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

1 kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output Current 0.25A per output

Safety Output Max. 0.5V

Voltage Drop

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated operating

Operating Voltage voltage

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Interconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2m

Connector:

M12x1, 8 pin quick connect

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see

page 188 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.

5

141


SERIES CSS 30S

Stainless Steel Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Stainless Steel Housing … ideal for hygienic applications.

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• IP69K rated housing (to DIN 40050-9) … suitable for high

pressure, high temperature wash downs.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1.

*See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 250mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

Description

The CSS 30S non-contact, electronic safety sensor is

designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring

the position of movable safety guards. In this application

the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,

sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 30S Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions

according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M

(self-monitoring).

Operation

The CSS 30S Safety Sensor and CST 30S-1 actuator are a

matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the

sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant

frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The

sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to

the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard

by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the

monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 30S Safety

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety

performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1,

control category 4 per EN 954-1).

AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

(Accessories Ordered Separately)

Model Number

Description

CSS 11-30-SD-M-ST

CSS 11-30S-D-M-ST

CST 30S-1

H 30

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 serial diagnostic

output

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 signalling output

Actuator

Mounting clamp

Note: For M12, 8 pin connection cables, see page 94.

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety

control modules recommended for this application.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable

machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a

machine is required, and/or where hostile environments

exist. Typical applications include food processing machinery,

pharmaceutical and medical applications, material handling

systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,

and marine and outdoor applications.

142


SERIES CSS 30S TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Stainless Steel

Degree of Protection IP67 to IEC/EN 60529

IP69K to DIN 40050-9

Switching Distance 11mm

Operating Temperature –25°C to +65°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Hysteresis

< 2mm

Repeatability

< 1mm

Response Time

< 60ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Conformity to Standards CE UL

IEC 60947-5-3 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

TUV EN 954-1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 0.6A

No Load Current 0.1A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output Current 0.25A per output

Safety Output Max. 0.5V

Voltage Drop

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output min. (Ue – 5 V)

Operating Voltage

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see

page 194 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.

5

143


SERIES CSS 16

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile

environments.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1.

*See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

• Same mounting dimensions as Series AZ16 … ideal

alternative in applications with alignment problems or harsh

environments.

AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

(Accessories Ordered Separately)

Model Number

Description

Description

The CSS 16 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed

for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the

position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety

sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or

removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 16 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions

according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M

(self-monitoring).

Operation

The CSS 16 Safety Sensor and CST 16-1 actuator are a

matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the

sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant

frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The

sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to

the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard

by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the

monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 16 Safety

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety

performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1,

or control category 4 per EN 954-1).

CSS-8-16-2P-E-L

CSS-8-16-2P+D-E-L

CSS-8-16-2P-Y-L

CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L

CST-16-1

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety

control modules recommended for this application.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.

CST16-1 Actuator

End or single device with pre-wired cable

End or single device with diagnostic

output, pre-wired cable

Series device with double pre-wired cable

Series device with diagnostic output,

pre-wired cable

Actuator

Sensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L in

catalog number. See page 94 for M12 connector cables (4-, 5-, or

8-pin).

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable

machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a

machine is required, and/or where hostile environments

exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile

machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling

systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,

and woodworking machinery.

144


SERIES CSS 16 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67/IP65

Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)

7.0mm to 11mm (Maximum)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C for max. output

current ≤ 500mA/output

–25°C to +65°C for output current

≤ 200mA/output

–25°C to +70°C for output current

≤ 100mA/output

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Hysteresis

max. 1mm

Repeatability

< 0.5mm

Response Time

≤ 30ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Conformity to Standards CE BG

IEC 61508 UL

IEC 60947-5-3 CSA

EN ISO 13849-1 EN 954-1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 1.1A

No Load Current 0.05A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output Current 0.5A per output

Safety Output Max. 0.5V

Voltage Drop

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated operating

Operating Voltage voltage

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or

Cable 7x0.25mm 2

NOTE: For complete technical data, diagnostics and wiring examples, please see

page 198 of the “Pulse-Echo Based Non-Contact Safety Sensors” section.

5

145


146

Safer

by

Design


BNS SERIES - COMPATIBLE SERIES AES SAFETY CONTROLLERS

SELECTION CHART

AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS

Safety Controller

Suitable for use with

Coded-Magnet Sensor

Part Numbers below

BNS250...

BNS33...

BNS303...

BNS250...

BNS33...

BNS303...

BNS36

BNS260

}

}

}

12Z(G)

11Z(G)

11Z(G)

02Z(G)

BNS16-12Z

BNS33-12Z(G)-2187

BNS-B20-12Z(G)

BNS33S-12Z(G)

Max. Number

of Directly-

Connected

BNS Series

Sensors

(without “daisy

chaining”)

Safety Controller

Part Number

(and available supply voltages)

Number

of Safety

Outputs

(Enabling

Paths)

Max.

Achievable

Safety

Rating per

EN 954-1

(ISO-13849-1)

Type of

Reset

Feedback

Circuit

1 AES1102 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 (b) Automatic No

2 AES1112 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC) 1 1 (b) Automatic No

1 AES1135 (24VDC)

1 1/3* (b/d)* Automatic No

2 AES1165 (24VDC)

1 1/3* (b/d)* Automatic No

1 AES1235 (24VDC)

2 3 (d) Automatic Yes

2 AES1265 (24VDC)

2 3 (d) Automatic Yes

1 AES2135 (24-230V AC/DC)

1 1/3* (b/d)* Automatic No

1 AES2335 (24-230V AC/DC)

3 3 (d) Automatic Yes

1 SRB211AN (24VAC/DC) 2 Stop Cat. 0 4 (e) Automatic Yes

1 Stop Cat. 1

or Manual

1 AES1337 (24VAC/DC)

3 4 (e) Automatic Yes

or Manual

6 AES2285

2

3 (d) Automatic Yes

SRB207AN-230V (48-240VAC)

or Manual

5

*Category 3 (Performance Level d) when safety controller is directly connect to load.

147


AES 1102/AES 1112

BNS Compatible Controllers

Features

• PL c per EN ISO 13849-1,

Control Category 1 to EN 954-1

• 1 enabling path

• Monitoring of 1 or a number of guard

devices

Connection of BNS .. -12z magnetic safety

sensors with 1 NO and 2 NC contacts

• LED function indicators

• Available for various operational voltages

Dimensions

22.5 x 100 x 121 mm

Model

Designation

AES 1102-24VDC

AES 1102-24VAC

AES 1102-42VAC

AES 1102-110VAC

AES 1102-230VAC

AES 1112-24VDC

AES 1112-24VAC

AES 1112-42VAC

AES 1112-110VAC

AES 1112-230VAC

Approvals BG UL CSA

148


AES 1102/AES 1112

Typical

Application

Typical

Wiring

Diagram

U

e

YE GN YE GN YE GN

BN WH BN WH BN WH

PK GY PK GY PK GY

L1

A1

A2

S22

S32

S14 C 13

24 VDC

K3

K2

K1

AES 1102

5

14

K4

N

3 M

Application

Notes

• AES to secure a number of guard

devices using series-parallel circuits

for PL c /Category 1 to EN ISO

13849-1, or Control Category 1 to

EN 954-1.

• Only suitable for the connection of

magnetic safety sensors.

• Monitoring a number of guard

devices using BNS 33..-12z-2187

range magnetic safety sensors with

isolated contacts.

• The wiring diagram is with guard

devices closed and shows the deenergized

condition.

• Use with multiple “daisy-chained”

inputs does not permit identification

of which guard/coded-magnet sensor

is in an open/fault condition.

• Monitoring one guard device using

a BNS .. -12z Series coded-magnet

safety sensor.

149


AES 1135/AES 1165

BNS Compatible Safety Controllers

Features

• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,

Control Category 3 to EN 954-1

• 1 enabling circuit

• Enable delay time can be modified

• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,

safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded

magnet sensors or E-stops

• Can be used as emergency-stop controller

for Category 0 to EN 60204-1

• Monitoring for short-circuit between

connections with NO-NC contact

combination

Connection of input expansion modules

possible

Dimensions

22.5 x 100 x 121 mm

Model

Designation

AES 1135-24VDC

AES 1165-24VDC

Function

Table

Additional semiconductor

output Y

Function of output Y

Switching Condition

AES 1135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closed

Y2 No enable Enable circuit open

Approvals BG UL CSA

150


AES 1135/AES 1165

Typical

Applications

Typical

Wiring

Diagram

5

Application

Notes

• AES to achieve up to PL d per EN

ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 3

per EN 954-1.

• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or

removable guard device using

a solenoid interlock.

• Extension of Enable Delay Time

The enable delay time can be

increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by

changing the position of a jumper

link connection under the cover of

the unit.

• Monitor 2 NC Contacts

Jumper A1 (24 VDC) to X1

• The NC contact must have positive

opening function when the guard

device is opened.

• The wiring diagram is with guard

device closed and shows the

de-energized condition.

151


AES 1235/AES 1265

BNS Compatible Safety Controllers

Dimensions

ISD

22.5 x 100 x 121 mm

The following faults are recognized by the safety

controller and indicated by means of ISD

• Failure of door contacts to open or close

• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections

• Interruption of the switch connections

• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or

drop-out

• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control

of the guard door monitor

Features

• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,

Control Category 3 to EN 954-1

• 2 enabling circuits

• Enable delay time can be modified

• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,

safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded

magnet sensors or E-stops

Contact combination can be changed from

NO-NC to NC-NC

• Can be used as emergency-stop controller

for Stop Category 0 to EN 60204-1

• Monitoring for short-circuit between

connections with NO-NC contact

combination

• ISD Integral System Diagnostics

• 2 short-circuit proof additional transistor

outputs

• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays

• Start function

• Operational voltage 24 VDC

Connection of input expansion modules

possible

• Additional contact by means of output

expansion modules

Model

Designation

AES 1235-24VDC

AES 1265-24VDC

Function

Table

Additional semiconductor

output Y

Function of output Y

Switching Condition

AES 1235 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closed

Y2 No authorized operation Enabling paths open

AES 1265 Y1 Authorized operation Enabling paths closed

Y2 Fault Enabling paths open

Approvals BG UL CSA

152


AES 1235/AES 1265

Typical

Applications

Typical

Wiring

Diagram

L1

0V

+24 VDC

A1

A2

Y1

X1

13

23

max. 100mA

K1

K2

AES 1235

AES 1236

S13

S14 S21 S22

14

24

0V

K3

SK3

K4

3

M

5

Application

Notes

• This model achieves PL d per EN

ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 3

to EN 954-1.

• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or

removable guard device, each

using a coded magnet sensor A.

• The wiring diagram is with guard

devices closed and shows the deenergized

condition.

• Start Pushbutton s

A start pushbutton (NO) can optionally

be connected to the inputs in

the feedback circuit. With the guard

device closed, the enabling circuits

are then not closed until the start

pushbutton has been operated.

• Feedback Circuit

A feedback circuit is shown connected

in the wiring diagram. If neither

a start push button nor feedback

circuit is used, input X1 must

be connected to 24 VDC (A1).

• Extension of Enable Delay Time

The enable delay time can be

increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by

changing the position of a jumper

link connection under the cover of

the unit.

• Modification for 2 NC Contacts

The safety motoring module can be

modified to monitor two NC contacts

by bridging terminals A1 and

X2. The cross-wire monitoring

between the connections

then becomes inoperative.

153


AES 2135

BNS Compatible Safety Controllers

Features

• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,

Control Category 3 to EN 954-1

• 1 enabling circuit

• Enable delay time can be modified

• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,

safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded

magnet sensors or E-stops

• Can be changed from NO-NC to NC-NC

contact combination

• Can be used as emergency-stop controller

for Category 0 to EN 60204-1

• Monitoring for short-circuit between

connections with NO-NC contact

combination

• ISD Integral System Diagnostics

Connection of input expansion modules

possible

• 2 semiconductor auxiliary outputs (nonsafety)

Dimensions

45 x 100 x 121 mm

ISD

The following faults are recognized by the safety

controller and indicated by means of ISD

• Failure of door contacts to open or close

• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections

• Interruption of the switch connections

• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or

drop-out

• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control

of the guard door monitor

Model

Designation

AES 2135 24-230V AC/DC

Function

Table

Additional semiconductor

output Y

Function of output Y

Switching Condition

AES 2135 Y1 Enable Enable circuit closed

Y2 No enable Enable circuit open

Approvals BG UL CSA

154


AES 2135

Typical

Applications

Typical

Wiring

Diagram

5

Application

Notes

• AES to achieve PL d per EN ISO

13849-1, or Control Category 3 to

EN 954-1.

• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or

removable guard device, each

using a safety coded magnet A.

• The wiring diagram is with

guard devices closed and

shows the de-energized

condition.

• Modification for 2 NC Contacts

The controller can be modified to

monitor two normally closed contacts

by jumping between the terminals

X3 and X4. The short circuit

monitoring between connections

then becomes inoperative.

• Extension of Enable Delay Time

The enable delay time can be

increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by

jumping between the terminals

X7 and X8.

155


AES 2335

BNS Compatible Safety Controllers

Dimensions

ISD

45 x 100 x 121 mm

The following faults are recognized by the safety

controller and indicated by means of ISD

• Failure of door contacts to open or close

• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections

• Interruption of the switch connections

• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or

drop-out

• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control

of the guard door monitor

• Failure of or functional fault on the safety controller

Features

• PL d per EN ISO 13849-1,

Control Category 3 to EN 954-1

• 3 enabling circuits

• Enable delay time can be modified

• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,

safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded

magnet sensors or E-stops

• NO-NC contact combination can be

connected

• Can be used as emergency-stop controller

for Category 0 to EN 60204-1

• Monitoring for short-circuit between

connections

• ISD Integral System Diagnostics

• Available for various operational voltages

• Short-circuit proof additional transistor

outputs

• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays

• Start function

Connection of input expansion modules

possible

• Additional contact by means of output

expansion modules

Model

Designation

AES 2335 24-230V AC/DC

Function

Table

Additional semiconductor

output Y

Function of output Y

Switching Condition

AES 2335 Y1 High (+24V) Enable circuit closed

Y2 High (+24V) Enable circuit open

Approvals BG UL CSA

156


AES 2335

Typical

Applications

Typical

Wiring

Diagram

5

Application

Notes

• This model achieves PL d per EN

ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 3

to EN 954-1.

• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or

removable guard device.

• The wiring diagram is with guard

device closed and shows the deenergized

condition.

• Start Pushbutton s

A start pushbutton (NO) can optionally

be connected to the inputs in

the feedback circuit. With the guard

device closed, the enabling circuits

are then not closed until the start

pushbutton has been operated.

• Feedback Circuit

For this purpose, the positive-drive

contacts of the external contactors

can be connected to input X1-X2. If

neither a start push button nor feedback

circuit are connected, a

jumper connection must be made

between X1 and X2.

• Modification for 2 NC Contacts

The controller can be modified to

monitor two normally closed contacts

by jumping between the

terminals X3 and X4. The short

circuit monitoring between connections

then becomes inoperative.

157


AES 1337

BNS Compatible Safety Controllers

TECHNICAL FEATURES

Description

The above “general-purpose” safety controllers are

designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open

(N.O.) or Normally-Closed (N.C.) outputs. Each is equipped

for connection of one input device in dual-channel configuration.

In addition they feature user-selectable monitoredmanual

or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of positiveguided

controlled loads and cross-short recognition (on

selected models).

Input Voltage

24 VAC/DC

# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)

Monitored

Monitored Contact Configuration 1 N.O. 1 N.C.

Number & Type Safety Outputs 3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)

Number & Type Auxiliary

1 N.C. 24 VDC

(Non-Safety or Signalling Output)

Typical Input Devices Monitored • E-stops (N.C.)

• Interlock switches (N.C.)

Type of Reset

(Selectable)

Feedback Monitoring

LED Displays

Conformity to Standards

Stop Category 0

• Monitored-manual

(24 VDC trailing edge)

• Automatic

Yes

Green LEDs for:

• K1 (safety relay 1)

• K2 (safety relay 2)

• Ui (voltage beyond internal

fuse)

UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)

Safety Classification PL e per EN ISO 13849-1

Control Category 4 per

EN 945-1

Type Fuse

Selected Features

Hybrid

• Cross-short recognition

• Selectable monitoredmanual

or automatic reset

• Feedback monitoring

Front View

AVAILABLE MODELS

Model Number

Operating Voltage

AES 1337

AES 1337

24 V AC/DC

Model AES 1337 shown.

158


AES 1337

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Ambient Operating

Temperature Range

Mechanical Life Expectancy

Weight

Mounting

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")

-25°C to +45°C

(-13°F to +113°F)

10 7 switching cycles

230 gm

DIN rail (35mm)

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Voltage

24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple

max. 10%

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption 2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VA

Fuse (Input Power)

24 V Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,

Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets after

interruption of supply voltage)

Fuse (Safety Outputs)

Switching Capacity

(Safety Outputs)

6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)

230 VAC, 6 A Resistive

(inductive with suitable surge supressor)

Switching Capacity 24 VDC, 100mA

(Auxiliary Contacts)

Application Category AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1

Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided

Contact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)

Air Clearance &

DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2

Creepage Distance

Cable Connections • Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals

for 13 to 20 AWG

• Stranded or multi-core with

wire end ferrule

Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013

5

159


SERIES SRB 211 AN

BNS Compatible Safety Controllers

TECHNICAL FEATURES

Description

The Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unit

designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open

and Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It is

equipped for connection of one monitored input device in

dual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectable

monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop

category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring

of positive-guided controlled loads.

Input Voltage

24 V AC/DC

# Discrete Input Devices 1 (Dual-Channel)

Monitored

Compatible Input Device N.O./N.C (Dry Contacts)

Contact Configuration

Number & Type

3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.)

Safety Outputs

(dry contacts)

Number & Type Auxiliary PNP

(Non-Safety or

Signalling Outputs)

Typical Input Devices • E-stops (N.C./N.O.)

Monitored

• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.)

Type of Reset

• Monitored-manual

(Selectable)

(24 VDC trailing edge)

• Automatic

Feedback Monitoring Yes

LED Displays

Green LEDs for:

• K1 (safety relay 1)

• K2 (safety relay 2)

• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)

• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)

• UB (voltage at input terminals)

Conformity to Standards

Stop Category

UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)

0 (2 safety outputs)

1 (1 safety output)

Safety Classification PL e per EN ISO 13849-1

Control Category 4 per EN 945-1

Selected Features

• Plug-in screw terminals

• Cross-short recognition

• Stop category 0 & 1

safety outputs

• Selectable trailing edge or

automatic reset

• Resetable electronic fuse

• Feedback monitoring

AVAILABLE MODELS

Model Number

SRB 211 AN

Operating Voltage

24 V AC/DC

160


SERIES SRB 211 AN

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Ambient Operating

Temperature Range

Mechanical Life Expectancy

Weight

Mounting

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm

(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")

-25°C to +45°C

(-13°F to +113°F)

>10 7 switching cycles

255 gm

DIN rail

Operating Voltage

Power Consumption

24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple

max. 10%

24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz

5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signaling

output Y1

Fuse (Input Power) Internal electronic Fuse F1,

Tripping current > 1.5A

(Resets approx. 1 second)

Fuse (Safety Outputs)

Switching Capacity

(Safety Outputs)

4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)

230 VAC, 4 A Resistive

(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)

Switching Capacity 24 VDC 100mA

(Auxiliary Contacts)

Application Category AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1

Pick-up Delay

≤ 40 ms

Drop-out Delay ≤ 50 ms

Contact Type & AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided

Materials

Contact Resistance 100 mOhm (max. in new state)

Air Clearance & DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2

Creepage Distance

Cable Connections • Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals

for 13 to 20 AWG

• Stranded or multi-core with

wire end ferrule

Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013

5

161


AES 2285/SRB 207 AN BNS Compatible Safety Controllers

TECHNICAL FEATURES

Description

The Model SRB 207 AN is a “general purpose” unit

designed for use with safety devices having Normally-

Open (N.O.) and Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts.

Each is equipped for connection with up to six input

devices such as E-stop push button and BNS coded

magnets. In addition it features user-selectable monitoredmanual

or automatic reset, six (non-safety) semiconductor

outputs for signalling/annunciation, and two safety outputs.

Input Voltage

See available models below

# Discrete Input Devices 6 (Dual-Channel)

Monitored

Compatible Input Device N.O./N.C. (Dry Contacts)

Contact Configuration

Number & Type

2 N.O. (Dry Contacts)

Safety Outputs

Number & Type Auxiliary 6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type

(Non-Safety or

semiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mA

Signalling Outputs)

1 - N.C. Auxiliary output

Typical Input Devices • Interlocks (N.O./N.C.)

Monitored

• Limit switches (N.O./N.C.)

Type of Reset

• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)

(Selectable)

• Automatic

Feedback Monitoring Yes

LED Displays

Green LEDs for:

• K1 (safety relay 1)

• K2 (safety relay 2)

• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)

Conformity to Standards

Stop Category 0

UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)

Safety Classification PL d per EN ISO 13849-1

Control Category 3 per EN 945-1

Selected Features

• Plug-in screw terminals

• Cross-short recognition

• Up to 6 monitored devices

• Seven auxiliary outputs

• Selectable monitored-manual or

automatic reset

Front View AES 2285/SRB 207

AVAILABLE MODELS

Model Number

AES 2285

SRB 207 AN-230V

Operating Input Voltage

24 VDC

48 - 230 VAC

162


AES 2285/SRB 207 AN

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Ambient Operating

Temperature Range

Mechanical Life Expectancy

Weight

Mounting

45mm x 100mm x 121mm

(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75")

-25°C to +45°C

(-13°F to +113°F)

>10 7 switching cycles

300 gm

DIN rail

TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input)

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Voltage

Power Consumption

24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple

max. 10%

48 VAC-240VAC, 50-60 Hz

3.0 W max. (For 24 VDC)

Approx. 6.8 VA (For 230 VAC)

(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y6)

Fuse (Input Power)

24 V Internal electronic Fuse F1,

Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after

approx. 1 second)

230 V Primary : Fuse (glass), tripping

current > 1 A

Secondary : Internal electronic fuse,

tripping current > 0.12 A

Fuse (Safety Outputs)

Switching Capacity

(Auxiliary Contacts)

Switching Capacity

(Safety Outputs)

6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)

Y1-Y6: 24 VDC, 20mA (PNP)

31-32: 24 VDC, 2 A (Dry)

230 VAC, 6 A Resistive

(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)

Application Category AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1

Pick-up Delay

Drop-out Delay

Contact Type & Material

Contact Resistance

Air Clearance &

Creepage Distance

Cable Connections

≤ 120 ms/≤ 30ns (auto start/reset button)

≤ 20 ms

AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided

100 mOhm (max. in new state)

DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2

• Self-lifting, plug-in screw

terminals for 13 to 20 AWG

• Stranded or multi-core with

wire end ferrule

Terminal Labeling DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013

5

163


164

Safer

by

Design


PULSE-ECHO BASED

NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORS

SELECTION GUIDE

Switch

Series

AZ 200

CSS 34

Type

AZM 200 Solenoid Interlock 1 3 ⁄4" × 9" × 2"

MZM 100

CSS 180

CSS 30S

CSS 16

Interlock

Magnetic-Latching

Interlock

Cylindrical

Safety Sensor

Rectangular

Safety Sensor

Stainless Steel Cylindrical

Safety Sensor

Safety Sensor

in AZ16 Housing

Envelope

Dimensions

1 1 ⁄2" × 8 3 ⁄4" × 1 1 ⁄2"

1 3 ⁄4" × 7 1 ⁄4" × 1 3 ⁄4"

1" × 4" × 1"

Contact

Configurations

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 or 3 diagnostic outputs

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 diagnostic output

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 diagnostic output

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 diagnostic output

Catalog

Page

166

172

178

0.7" × 3.6" 2 PNP Safety Outputs 182

1.18" Dia × 3.5"

1.25" × 2" × 3"

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 diagnostic output

2 PNP Safety Outputs

1 diagnostic output

188

194

198

6

SD-Gateway for Field Bus connection Serial Diagnostic signal converter 204

Pules Echo accessories Connectors for series wiring 206

165


SERIES AZ 200

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Interlock Switch

Features & Benefits

• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch and

actuator required for operation.

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—no

additional door handles are needed.

• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states

• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …

satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Control

Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note on next page.

• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be

left quickly and safely.

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door

opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding

actuator.

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

Description

The AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock is

designed for use with movable machine guards/access gates

which must be closed for operator safety.

The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unit

with door handle and optional emergency exit handle. The

actuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting the

actuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizing

pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock can

have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages the

interlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which in

turns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echo

technology provides diagnostic information and detects and

indicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two different

actuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards.

The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 250 mA. It features one electronic diagnostic output that

can signal errors before the safety outputs are switched off,

thus enabling a controlled shutdown of the machine.

With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of

the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,

up to 31 AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic output

can be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance

level/control category (PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or control

category 4 per EN 954-1).

Typical Applications

The AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the

operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical

applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access

panels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable for

both sliding guards and hinged guards.

166

AVAILABLE AZ200 MODELS

Part Number

Description

Screw Terminals

AZ200SK-T1P2P

Door detection sensor, diagnostic

output, 2 PNP safety outputs

AZ200SK-TSD2P

Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic

output*, 2 PNP safety outputs

M23 x1 quick connect, 8+1pole

AZ200ST1-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic

output, 2 PNP safety outputs

AZ200ST1-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic

output*, 2 PNP safety outputs

M12x1 quick connect, 8 pole

AZ200ST2-T1P2P Door detection sensor, diagnostic

output, 2 PNP safety outputs

AZ200ST2-TSD2P Door detection sensor, serial diagnostic

output*, 2 PNP safety outputs

*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with

various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.

ACTUATORS

Part Number

Description

AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left

AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left with inside emergency door

release

AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right

AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right with inside emergency door

release

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

with inside emergency door release

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

with inside emergency door release

Note: For appropriate connector cable for ST models,

please see page 94.

For ST1 models, order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...

For ST2 models, order cable staring with A-K8P-M12...


SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS

Part number: SZ200

Description:

Lockout tag,

up to 5 padlocks

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP

semiconductor outputs. See page 320 for

recommended SCHMERSAL safety control

modules.

Note: A safety control module may be required

for reset function and/or feedback monitoring

functions, as well as increased output

current requirements.

DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR

AZ/AZM 200-B1

for sliding doors

1 – A1 Supply voltage UB

2 – X1 Safety input 1

3 – A2 GND

4 – Y1 Safety output 1

5 – OUT Diagnostic output

6 – X2 Safety input 2

7 – Y2 Safety output 2

8 – IN serial diagnostic input

9 – without function

1 – A1 Supply voltage UB

2 – X1 Safety input 1

3 – A2 GND

4 – Y1 Safety output 1

5 – OUT Diagnostic output

6 – X2 Safety input 2

7 – Y2 Safety output 2

8 – IN serial diagnostic input

6

167


SERIES AZ 200 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +60°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Response Time

≤ 60ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Mounting

40-45mm profiles

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-1 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE

Door hinge on

left-hand side

A

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 0.6A

No Load Current 0.1A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output

0.25A per output

Operating Current

Safety Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Type Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15

AWG flexible stranded wire

(1.5 mm 2 )

Door hinge on

right-hand side

AZ/AZM 200-B30

for hinged doors

B

Legend

A=Front and rear manual release

B=Cable entry M20 x 1,5

C=Emergency exit P1

D=Door handle G1

C

C

D

D

168


SERIES AZ 200 DIAGNOSTICS

Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs

LED State AZ 200

Safety

Outputs

Diagnostic Outputs

AZ200...-1P2P

OUT

Green

Door open

0 V 0 V

Green

Door closed

0 V

0 V

Yellow & Green

Door closed and actuator inserted

24 V

24 V

Blinking red (1–6 impulses) Error: see blinking codes

1

After 30 min ➞ 0 V

2

With door detection sensor (-T) always high

24 V 1

0 V

Diagnostic LED error codes

The blinking sequence of the red LED of the AZ 200 identifies the active error.

The following errors are indicated:

Indication (red)

Meaning

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire

4 blinking impulses Temperature too high

5 blinking impulses Target error

6 blinking impulses Error target combination

Continuous red

Error

Blinking Codes (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although

the output is switched off

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”,

although the output is switched off

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error at

both outputs

4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high an

inner temperature

5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min.

The difference between the code (frequency) of

the detected target and the set value is too large,

false target

6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected at

the 4 coils of the AZ200 T. (Current setting: latching

bolt detected & door target not detected => latch

breakage or tampering attempt)

6

Continuous Red Internal error 0 min.

169


SERIES AZ 200 WIRING EXAMPLES

WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING

WIRING COMPARTMENT

Supply Voltage

Supply Voltage

Safety Input 1

Safety Input 2

Ground

Ground

Meaning

Safety Output 1

Safety Output 2

Diagnostic Output

24 V

24 V

X1

X2

GND

GND

Y1

Y2

Terminal

OUT

Note: In case of single device wiring, the

bridge between the “24 V” terminal and

the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be

established; for series wiring, this bridge

must only be established in the first

device of the series.

WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZ 200

170

Series wiring up to 31 sensors

without loss of PL e per EN

ISO 13849-1, or control

category 4 per EN 954-1.


6

Safer

by

Design

171


SERIES AZM 200

Description

The AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,

motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.

The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock and

actuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exit

handle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing,

protecting the actuator and the operator against damage and

injury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator

and interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator

still engages the interlock.

Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle,

the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even during

a power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model).

The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with two

short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can

switch up to 250 mA.

With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of

the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,

up to 31 AZM 200 solenoid interlocks can be wired in series

without detriment to the Safety Performance Level control

category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 4

per EN 954-1).

Typical Applications

The AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which must not be opened until

dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of

power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,

spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical

applications are textile machines, stamping machines,

metal working equipment, printing presses and

packaging machines.

172

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Solenoid Interlock

Features & Benefits

• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardous

areas until safe conditions exist.

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—no

additional door handles are needed.

• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states

• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …

satisfy requirements of PL e to EN ISO 13849-1, or Control

Category 4 to EN 954-1. *See Note Below.

• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be

left quickly and safely—even during a power failure.

• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door opening

… no risk of injury or damage from a protruding actuator.

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

AVAILABLE AZM200 MODELS

Part Number

Description

Spring to Lock, Power to unlock

AZM200SK-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)

AZM200SK-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw

Terminals)

AZM200ST1-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick

connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST1-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1

quick connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST2-T1P2P Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick

connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST2-TSD2P Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1

quick connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST-T1P2P-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &

LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)

Power to Lock, Spring to unlock

AZM200SK-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (Screw Terminals)

AZM200SK-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (Screw

Terminals)

AZM200ST1-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M23x1 quick

connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST1-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M23x1

quick connect, 9 pin)

AZM200ST2-T1P2PA Diagnostic Output (M12x1 quick

connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST2-TSD2PA Serial Diagnostic Output* (M12x1

quick connect, 8 pin)

AZM200ST-T1P2PA-2568 Diagnostic Output, with pushbutton &

LED (M23x1 quick connect, 12 pin)

ACTUATORS

Part Number

Description

AZ/AZM200-B1-LT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left

AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

left with inside emergency door release

AZ/AZM200-B1-RT Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right

AZ/AZM200-B1-RTP0 Sliding Guard Actuator, approach from

right with inside emergency door

release

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on left

with inside emergency door release

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

AZ/AZM200-B30-RTAG1P1 Door Handle Actuator, hinged on right

with inside emergency door release


SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS

Part number: SZ200

Description:

Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocks

Connector Cables for ST Models

Please see page 94 for appropriate connector cable part numbers.

ST1 versions use M12, 8 pin connectors

(part numbers starting A-K8P-M12...)

ST2 versions use M23, 9 pin connectors

(part numbers starting A-K8+1-M23...)

ST versions use M23, 12 pin connectors

(part numbers starting A-K12P-M23...)

*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with

various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.

Safety Control Module Requirements Dualchannel

safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. See

page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL safety control modules.

Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as well as

increased output current requirements.

DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200, AZM 200-2568 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR

AZM200SK

AZM200ST

AZM200 … -2568

AZ/AZM 200-B1

for sliding doors

Pushbutton, for authorized

release at switch site

“ST” Pin Assignments

1 – A1 Supply voltage UB

2 – X1 Safety input 1

3 – A2 GND

4 – Y1 Safety output 1

5 – OUT Diagnostic output

6 – X2 Safety input 2

7 – Y2 Safety output 2

8 – IN serial diagnostic input

9 – without function

1 – A1 Supply voltage UB

2 – X1 Safety input 1

3 – A2 GND

4 – Y1 Safety output 1

5 – OUT Diagnostic output

6 – X2 Safety input 2

7 – Y2 Safety output 2

8 – IN serial diagnostic input

6

173


SERIES AZM 200 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Holding Force 30N (7 pounds)

Solenoid Holding Force 2300N (506 pounds)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +60°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Response Time

≤ 30ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Mounting

40-45mm profiles

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-1 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 1.0A

No Load Current 0.5A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output

0.25A per output

Operating Current

Safety Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Type Terminals Screw Terminals for up to 15

AWG flexible stranded wire

(1.5 mm 2 )

Door hinge on

left-hand side

A

Door hinge on

right-hand side

AZ/AZM 200-B30

for hinged doors

B

Legend

A=Front and rear manual release

B=Cable entry M20 x 1,5

C=Emergency exit P1

D=Door handle G1

C

C

D

D

174


SERIES AZM 200 DIAGNOSTICS

Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs

Diagnostic Outputs

LED State AZM 200 Safety Outputs

AZM200...-1P2P

OUT

Green

Door open

0 V

0 V

Yellow & green

Actuator inserted and locked

24 V

24 V

Blinking yellow

Actuator inserted and not locked

0 V

24 V

Blinking red (1–6 impulses)

Error: see blinking codes

24 V 1

0 V

1

After 30 min ➞ 0 V

Diagnostic LED error codes

The blinking sequence of the red

LED of the AZM 200 identifies the

active error. The following errors

are indicated:

Indication (red)

Meaning

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire

4 blinking impulses Temperature too high

5 blinking impulses Target error

6 blinking impulses Error target combination

Continuous red

Error

Blinking Codes (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although

the output is switched off

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although

the output is switched off

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error at

both outputs

4 blinking impulses Temperature too high 30 min. Temperature measurement indicates too high an

inner temperature

5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min.

The difference between the code (frequency) of

the detected target and the set value is too large,

false target

6 blinking impulses Error target combination 0 min. An invalid combination of targets was detected at

the 4 coils of the AZM. (Current setting: latching

bolt detected & door target not detected => latch

breakage or tampering attempt)

6

Continuous Red Internal Error 0 min.

175


SERIES AZM 200 WIRING EXAMPLES

WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING

WIRING COMPARTMENT

Meaning

Supply Voltage

Supply Voltage

Safety Input 1

Safety Input 2

Solenoid Input

Ground

Ground

Safety Output 1

Safety Output 2

Diagnostic Output

Terminal

24 V

24 V

X1

X2

IN

GND

GND

Y1

Y2

OUT

Note: In case of single device wiring, the

bridge between the “24 V” terminal and

the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be

established; for series wiring, this bridge

must only be established in the first

device of the series.

WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZM 200

+24VDC

24V 24V X1 X2 IN

AZM 200

24V 24V X1 X2 IN

AZM 200

24V 24V X1 X2 IN

AZM 200

GND

GND

Y1 Y2 OUT

GND

GND

Y1 Y2 OUT

GND

GND

Y1 Y2 OUT

0V

Reset

I1

I2

PLC

I3

+24VDC

K B

K A

Q1

Q2

Q3

A1 S12 S22 X1 X2

13 23 33 41

SRB 301 LC/B

A2

14

24 34 42

176

Series wiring up to 31 sensors

without loss of PL e per EN ISO

13849-1, or control category 4

per EN 954-1

0V

K A

K B

N


6

Safer

by

Design

177


SERIES MZM 100

Non-Contact Magnetic-Latching Interlock

Features & Benefits

• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardous

areas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holding

force).

• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical wear

due to non-contact design.

• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states

• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …

satisfy requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control

Category 4 per EN 954-1. *See Note Below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanical

latching required (“r” version only).

• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal where

high hygienic standards need to be maintained.

• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.

AVAILABLE MZM100 MODELS

Description

The MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cells

where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled

until safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching feature

permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,

which may exist immediately after removal of power, have

abated.

The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock and

actuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 N

holding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detects

and monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensor

technology permits an offset between the actuator and interlock

of ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal.

The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channel

design with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of

which can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanently

electronically measured and monitored. If the holding

force drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled,

recognizing a dirty interlock.

With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of

the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors, up

to 31 MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired in

series without detriment to the Safety Performance Level control

category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or control category 4

per EN 954-1).

Typical Applications

The MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch

on movable machine guards which must not be opened until

dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of

power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,

spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical

applications are textile machines, stamping machines, food

processing equipment, metal working equipment, woodworking

and packaging machines.

Part Number

Description

MZM100ST-1P2PA 2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic

output

MZM100ST-SD2PA 2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic

output

MZM100ST-1P2PRA 2-PNP safety outputs, diagnostic

output, with variable latching (30N to

240N)

MZM100ST-SD2PRA 2-PNP safety outputs, Serial diagnostic

output, with variable latching (30N

to 240N)

*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with

various field bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways.

ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

MZM100-B1.1

Actuator

MS MZM 100-W

Mounting Set

Note: For appropriate connector cable, please see page 94.

Order cable starting with A-K8+1-M23...

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL

safety control modules.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.

178


SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67

Unlocked Holding Force 35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only)

Magnetic Holding Force 500N (112 pounds)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Response Time

≤ 100ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Mechanical Life

1 million operations

Mounting

40mm profiles

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-1 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

DIMENSIONS

Switch

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Magentic & Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 1.0A

No Load Current 0.5A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output

0.25A per output

Operating Current

Safety Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated

Operating Voltage operating voltage

Termination

Connector M23x1

Actuator

6

Mounting Set

Exploded View

179


SERIES MZM 100 DIAGNOSTICS

Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs

State MZM 100

LED

Safety outputs Diagnostic output

green yellow red Y1, Y2 OUT

Guard open

on off off

0 V

0 V

Guard closed, unlocked

on blinks off

0 V

24 V

Guard closed and locked

on on off

24 V

24 V

Warning, door locked on on blinks**

24 V* 0 V

Error, door locked on off blinks**

0 V 0 V

* after 30 min. 0V ** see blinking code

Diagnostic LED error codes

The blinking sequence of the red

LED of the MZM 100 identifies the

active error. The following errors

are indicated:

Indication (red)

Meaning

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire

5 blinking impulses Target error

6 blinking impulses Error holding force

10 blinking impulses Magnet is too hot

Continuous Red

Internal Error

Blinking Codes (red) Meaning Autonomous switch-off after Cause

1 blinking impulse Error output Y1 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although

the output is switched off

2 blinking impulses Error output Y2 30 min. Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although

the output is switched off

3 blinking impulses Cross-wire 30 min. Cross-wire between the output cables or error at

both outputs

5 blinking impulses Target error 0 min. The difference between the code (frequency) of the

detected target and the set value is too large, false target

6 blinking impulses Holding force error 0 min. The required holding force is not obtained (misalignment/soiling).

The holding force is < 500 N.

10 blinking impulses Magnet temperature 0 min. The magnet is too hot: Temperature is too high T>70°C

Continuous Red Internal error 0 min.

180


SERIES MZM 100 WIRING EXAMPLE

Safety Sensors in large systems

The sensors have separate input

and output cables. The output of one

sensor can be directly wired into the

input of the next sensor. The sensor

chain can be built up over a length of

two hundred meters.

The supply voltage is wired in both

safety inputs of the last solenoid

interlock of the chain (starting from

the control relay). The safety outputs

of the first interlock are wired to the

control relay.

SERIES CONNECTION OF MZM 100

Safety outputs -> Control relay

Series wiring up to 31 sensors

without loss of PL e per EN ISO

13849-1, or control category 4

per EN 954-1

WIRING OF THE INTEGRATED CONNECTOR MZM 100

6

Solenoid interlock with diagnostic output

Pin configuration

A1 Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 1

A2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 3

X1 safety input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 2

X2 safety input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 6

Y1 safety output 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 4

Y2 safety output 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 7

OUT diagnostic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 5

IN magnet control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 8

181


SERIES CSS 180

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile

environments.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1.

*See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

AVAILABLE CSS180 MODELS

Description

The CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is

designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring

the position of movable safety guards. In this application

the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,

sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions

according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M

(self-monitoring).

Operation

The CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are a

matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the

sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant

frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The

sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to

the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard

by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the

monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 180 Safety

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the

Safety Performance Level/control category (PL e per EN ISO

13849-1, control category 4 per EN 954-1).

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable

machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a

machine is required, and/or where hostile environments

exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile

machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling

systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,

and woodworking machinery.

Part Number

CSS-8-180-2P-E-L

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L

CSS-8-180-2P-E-LST

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-LST

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-LST

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-LST

Description

End or single device with pre-wired

cable

End or single device with diagnostic

output, pre-wired cable

Series device with double pre-wired

cables

Series device with diagnostic output,

pre-wired cables

End or single device, pre-wired cable

with M12x1 4 pole connection

End or single device with diagnostic

output, pre-wired cable with M12x1 5

pole connection

Series device, two pre-wired cables

with M12x1 4 pole connections

Series device with diagnostic output,

two pre-wired cables with M12x1 8

pole connections

ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES

Part Number

Description

CST-180-1

Actuator

CST-180-2

Actuator

CSA-M-1

Magnetic latch

H-18 Mounting clamp

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL

safety control modules.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.

182


SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP67

Switching Distance 8mm (Nominal)

7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +55°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Hysteresis

≤ 0.5mm

Repeatability

≤ 0.2mm

Response Time

≤ 30ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-3 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 1.0A

No Load Current 0.05A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output Current 0.5A per output

Safety Output Max. 0.5V

Voltage Drop

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated operating

Operating Voltage voltage

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Type Interconnection 4x0.5mm 2 , 5x0.34mm 2 , or

Cable 7x0.25mm 2

DIMENSIONS

CST-180-1 Actuator

CSS 180 Safety Sensor

5.6mm hole diameter

Refer to order information for cable

types, cable length and cable crosssectional

area.

CST-180-2 Actuator

Mounting Clamp

Magnetic Latch

6

38

14

28

6

18

1,5

34

21

16

36

5,2

5,2

60

183


SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA

SWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTING

Typical Response Range

of the Sensor CSS 180

S ON Switch-on point S ON 0 V

184


SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 1

Safety Sensors in large systems

The sensors have separate input and output

cables. The output of one sensor can be

directly wired into the input of the next sensor.

The sensor chain can be built up over

a length of two hundred meters, up to 16

devices.

Sensors used:

1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P-E-L:

This sensor has one output cable. It is

designed for the beginning of a chain

or for use as a single device.

3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L:

These sensors have separate input

and output cables. The output of the

first sensor is wired into the input of

the next sensor and so on. This type

of sensor can also be used as the first

sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage

is bridged to the safety inputs.

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180

Up to 16 devices can be wired in

series, maximum of 200 meters.

CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L

Input

Gray cable

Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)

(BU) blue 0 V

Safety Input (BK) black channel 1

(WH) white channel 2

Output

Black cable

Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)

(BU) blue 0 V

Safety Output (BK) black channel 1

(WH) white channel 2

6

CSS-8-180-2P-E-L

Output

Black cable

Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)

(BU) blue 0 V

Safety Output (BK) black channel 1

(WH) white channel 2

185


SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 2

Series connection of up

to 16 Safety Sensors

CSS 180 in small

systems with a

centralized control

cabinet or wiring via

junction boxes.

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180

Sensors used:

1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L:

This sensor has one output cable. It is

designed for the beginning of a chain or for

use as a single device.

3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L:

The inputs and outputs of the sensors are

brought out in one cable. The sensors are

wired together in series in the control cabinet

or in junction boxes.

This type of sensor can also be used as the

first sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage is

bridged to the safety inputs. For very long

sensors chains it is recommended to feed the

power supply directly to the first sensor in the

chain to avoid excessive voltage drop. The safe

outputs of the last sensor in the chain are connected

to the safety control module.

If junction boxes are used, standard installation

cable can be used for the wiring between junctions.

When laid together with control cables in

a separated cable channel, shielding is not

necessary.

Up to 16 devices can be

wired in series, maximum

of 200 meters.

Note: CSS units should be connected to the

same regulated power supply.

CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L

Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)

(BU) blue 0 V

Safety Input (WH) white channel 1

(VT) violet channel 2

Safety Output (RD) red channel 1

(BK) black channel 2

(GY) gray diagnostic output

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L

Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)

(BU) blue 0 V

Safety Output (BK) black channel 1

(WH) white channel 2

(GY) gray diagnostic output

186


WIRING EXAMPLES FOR PULSE-ECHO BASED SENSORS

SERIES-WIRING OF VARIOUS SENSORS AND SOLENOID INTERLOCKS WITH DIAGNOSTIC OUTPUT

Open solenoid

interlock

Safety

outputs


SAFETY

CONTROLLER

The CSS 180, CSS 34, MZM 100, AZ 200 and AZM 200 can be wired in series in any desired combination. For the

CSS 180, 16 devices maximum can be wired in series; for the CSS 34 and AZM 200, maximum 31 devices. If the

CSS 180 is used in a “mixed” series-wiring, the maximum number of series-wired devices is limited to 16. The

maximum number of devices depends upon a maximum cable length of 200m.

PRODUCT SELECTION

This example applies to the following series-wired devices.

6

Device

Description

CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L

with

CST-180-1

With diagnostic output,

connecting cable 5-wire

Actuator

CSS-14-34-S-D-M-L

with

CST-34-S-1

AZM 200..-T-1P2P,a

Position of the active

face, on the side,

connecting cable, 7-wire

Actuator, on the side

1 diagnostic output with

power-to-lock principle

and door detection sensor

187


SERIES CSS 34

Pulse-Echo Based Compact

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety of

mounting options.

• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile

environments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring (CSS34), feedback and reset

functions (CSS34F0/F1) … satisfy requirements of PL e per

EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1, and

may remove need for safety control module. *See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easy

and accurate alignment of sensor and actuator.

Description

The CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed for

application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the position

of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor

monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or removable

guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 34 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions according to

EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M (self-monitoring).

The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a matched

pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the sensor excites

the actuator at a predetermined resonant frequency and the reads

back the actuator oscillation. The sensor evaluates the actuator

frequency and its distance to the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard by

the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up to

250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the monitoring

of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 34 Safety Sensors can

be wired in series without detriment to the safety performance

level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, control category

4 per EN 954-1).

The models CSS34 F0/F1 have an integrated feedback option

that control positive-guided contactors/relays without the need for

a downstream safety control module. The integrated start/restart

interlock feature provides an input for a reset pushbutton with

edge detection, or without edge detection (suitable for automatic

reset). The CSS34F0/F1 models are suitable as individual or end

devices in a series wired chain of standard CSS34 sensors to

replace a safety control module. The CSS34F0/F1 system, comprising

the sensor, monitored relay and the reset switch, meets

the requirements of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control

Category 4 per EN954-1, provided that positive guided contactors/relays

are used.

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable

machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a machine

is required, and/or where hostile environments exist. Typical

applications include printing machinery, textile machinery, paper

converting equipment, material handling systems, pack-

188

aging machinery, chemical processing equipment, and

woodworking machinery.

AVAILABLE MODELS

(Actuators Ordered Separately)

Model Number

Standard Version

Description

CSS12-34-VDML*

CSS12-34-VDMST*

CSS14-34-SDML*

CSS14-34-SDMST*

F0

CSS12-34F0-VDMST

CSS14-34F0-SDMST

F1

CSS12-34F1-VDMST

CSS14-34F1-SDMST

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic output

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Integrated Feedback, without edge

detection, auto-reset

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic output,

M12 Cable connector

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Integrated Feedback, with edge

detection of reset button, manual reset

Top Actuating surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Side Actuation surface with diagnostic

output, M12 Cable connector

Sensors available with a serial diagnostic cable, for use with

various field bus protocols. Please see page 204 for SD

Gateways.

Note: See page 94 for M12, 9 pin connector cables.

Model Number

CST34-S-1

CST34-V-1

AVAILABLE ACTUATORS

Side surface actuator

Top surface actuator

Description

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for recommended SCHMERSAL

safety control modules.

*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.


SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic

Degree of Protection IP65 and IP67

Switching Distance Top (V) 12mm Nominal

10-15mm (Maximum)

Side (S) 14mm Nominal

12-17mm (Maximum)

Operating Temperature –25°C to +70°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Hysteresis

1mm

Repeatability

≤ 0.5mm

Response Time

≤ 30ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Conformity to Standards CE BG

EN 60947-5-3 UL

EN 954-1 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 0.6A

No Load Current 0.1A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

1 kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output Current 0.25A per output

Safety Output Max. 0.5V

Voltage Drop

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output

Max. 4V below rated operating

Operating Voltage voltage

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

Interconnection Cable: Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm 2 ), 2m

Connector:

M12x1, 8 pin quick connect

DIMENSIONS

CST Actuator

CSS 34 Safety Sensor

6

Integrated Mounting Plate

(included with delivery)

189


SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA

SWITCHING DISTANCES

The actuating curves represent the points

at which the CSS 34 sensor switches on

and off upon the approach of the actuator.

Actuation From Side

Actuation From Top

Legend

S

Switching Distance

V, V1, V2 Possible misalignment

(see drawings at right)

S ON Switch-on point

S OFF Switch-off point

S H

Hysteresis area

S H = SOFF – SON

Sao Assured operation point

Sar Assured release point

(according to EN60947-5-3)

Sideways Misalignment

Horizontal: Max ±10mm (V2)

Vertical: Max ±18mm (V1)

Top Misalignment

Horizontal: Max ±8.5mm (V)

Minimum distance between two

sensor sets: approximately 100mm

Function table of visual diagnostic LED

Visual diagnostic (red) Cause of fault

1 pulse Fault on Output Y1

2 pulses

Fault on Output Y2

3 pulses

4 pulses

5 pulses

Continuous

190

Cross-wire short Y1/Y2

Ambient temperature too high

Incorrect or defective actuator

Internal fault

Six different fault conditions are signalled by the diagnostic LED

flashing with predefined pulse sequence or with continuous red light.

Electronic Diagnostic function of CSS34 or CSS34F with conventional diagnostic output

Sensor Condition

*Only for CSS34F0/F1 with feedback circuit

1

The sensor waits for a signal from the feedback circuit:

F0 – Close feedback circuit

F1 – Trailing edge on feedback circuit

LEDs

Green Red Yellow

Electronic

diagnostic output

24V DC, 50mA

Safety outputs

No Target, Power On On Off Off 0V 0V

Actuated On Off On 24V 24V

Actuated in limit area On Off

Actuated and

feedback circuit open*

Actuated in limit area and

feedback circuit open*

On

On

Off

Flashes

(1Hz)

Flashes

(5Hz)

Flashes

(1Hz/5Hz)

24V pulsed

Fault On Flashes On 0V

Off

24V

24V 0V 1

24V pulsed 0V 1

30 min. delay

24V➞0V


SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 1

Series wiring with single diagnostic output

The supply voltage is wired to both safety inputs

of the last sensor of the chain (starting from the

safety controller). The safety outputs of the first

sensor are wired to the safety controller. The

sensor chain can be built up over a length of

two hundred meters.

Sensors used:

Safety Sensor CSS14-34-SDML:

This sensor has one output cable. The output of the first sensor is wired into

the input of the next sensor and so on.

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS 34

Series wiring up to 31 sensors without

loss of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/control

category 4 per EN 954-1

CSS14-34-SDML

Operating Voltage (BN) brown P (+24 V)

6

(BU) blue 0 V

Safety Input (WH) white channel 1

(VT) violet channel 2

Signal Output (GY) gray diagnostic

(PK) pink nonfunction

Safety Output (BK) black channel 1

(RD) red channel 2

191


SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 2

Wiring example for series-wiring of the CSS 34 and CSS

34F1 safety sensors with conventional diagnostic outputs

In a safety chain of multiple sensors, only the first device can

be a sensor of the CSS 34F type. All other components of the

chain must be of the default type CSS 34, up to a maximum

length of 200m.

The CSS 34F1 safety sensor enables a direct control of the

contactor or relay. The internal monitoring module of the CSS

34F1 version monitors the trailing edge of the reset button in

addition to the feedback contacts. The sensor is switched on

when the button is released. It can be used for manual reset

on safety guards with accessible protection field. The protected

field must be designed in such manner that a single reset button

can be used.

SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS34 AND CSS34F1

Series wiring up to 31 sensors without

loss of PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/control

category 4 per EN 954-1

192


SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 3

Wiring example for the CSS 34F0 safety sensors with

conventional diagnostic output with auxiliary relay for

controlling high-capacity contactors

Additional auxiliary relays are used when the capacity of

the safety outputs of the sensor is insufficient to enable direct control

of the contactors or to switch, e.g., from 24V DC to 230V AC.

The NC contacts of the load-switching contactors are monitored.

CONNECTION OF CSS34F0 WITH RELAYS TO SWITCH HIGH-CAPACITY LOADS

6

193


SERIES CSS 30S

Stainless Steel Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Stainless Steel Housing … ideal for hygienic applications.

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• IP69K rated housing (to DIN 40050-9) … suitable for high

pressure, high temperature wash downs.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e

per EN ISO 13849-1, or Control Category 4 per EN 954-1.

*See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 31 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 250mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

Description

The CSS 30S non-contact, electronic safety sensor is

designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring

the position of movable safety guards. In this application

the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,

sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 30S Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions

according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M

(self-monitoring).

Operation

The CSS 30S Safety Sensor and CST 30S-1 actuator are a

matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the

sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant

frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The

sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to

the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard

by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the

monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 31 CSS 30S Safety

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety

performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/

control category 4 per EN 954-1).

AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

(Accessories Ordered Separately)

Model Number

Description

CSS 11-30-SD-M-ST

CSS 11-30S-D-M-ST

CST 30S-1

H 30

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 serial diagnostic

output*

2 PNP safety outputs, 1 signaling output

Actuator

Mounting clamp

Note: For M12, 8 pin connection cables, see page 94.

*Sensors with Serial Diagnostic output are for use with various field

bus protocols, see page 204 for SD Gateways

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety

control modules recommended for this application.

Note: A safety control module may be required for reset

function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as

well as increased output current requirements.

Typical Applications

The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable

machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a

machine is required, and/or where hostile environments

exist. Typical applications include food processing machinery,

pharmaceutical and medical applications, material handling

systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment,

and marine and outdoor applications.

194


SERIES CSS 30S TECHNICAL DATA

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Housing

Stainless Steel

Degree of Protection IP67 to IEC/EN 60529

IP69K to DIN 40050-9

Switching Distance 11mm

Operating Temperature –25°C to +65°C

Storage Temperature –25°C to +85°C

Hysteresis

< 2mm

Repeatability

< 1mm

Response Time

< 60ms

Vibration Resistance 10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm

Shock Resistance 30g/11ms

Conformity to Standards CE UL

IEC 60947-5-3 CSA

IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849-1

TUV EN 954-1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mode of Operation Inductive

Rated Operating Voltage 24 VDC -15%/+10%

Rated Operating Current 0.6A

No Load Current 0.1A

Residual Current

≤ 0.5mA

Rated Impulse

0.8kV

Withstand Voltage

Rated Insulation Voltage 32 VAC/VDC

Safety Outputs

(2) PNP, short-circuit proof

Safety Output Current 0.25A per output

Safety Output Max. 0.5V

Voltage Drop

Signaling Output

PNP, short-circuit proof

Signaling Output min. (Ue – 5 V)

Operating Voltage

Signaling Output Max. 0.05A

Operating Current

DIMENSIONS

6

195


SERIES CSS 30S TECHNICAL DATA

SWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTING

Typical Response Range

of the Sensor CSS 30S

S ON Switch-on point S ON


6

Safer

by

Design

197


SERIES CSS 16

Pulse-Echo Based

Non-Contact Safety Sensor

Features & Benefits

• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.

• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile

environments.

• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and

actuator required for operation.

• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy

installation and troubleshooting.

• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of PL e per

EN ISO 13849-1, or Safety Control Category 4 to EN 954-1.

*See note below.

• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 16 devices, max

200 m, can be wired in series without detriment to safety

performance level.

• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application

versatility.

• Same mounting dimensions as Series AZ16 … ideal

alternative in applications with alignment problems or harsh

environments.

AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

(Accessories Ordered Separately)

Model Number

Description

Description

The CSS 16 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed

for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the

position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety

sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or

removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.

The CSS 16 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity

devices with defined behavior under fault conditions

according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M

(self-monitoring).

Operation

The CSS 16 Safety Sensor and CST 16-1 actuator are a

matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the

sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant

frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The

sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to

the actuator.

Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard

by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.

The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit

proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up

to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the

monitoring of the safety outputs, up to 16 CSS 16 Safety

Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the safety

performance level/control category (PL e per EN ISO 13849-1/

Control Category 4 per EN954-1).

CSS-8-16-2P-E-L

CSS-8-16-2P+D-E-L

CSS-8-16-2P-Y-L

CSS-8-16-2P+D-M-L

CST-16-1

End or single device with pre-wired cable

End or single device with diagnostic

output, pre-wired cable

Series device with double pre-wired cable

Series device with diagnostic output,

pre-wired cable

Actuator

Sensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L in

catalog number. See page 94 for M12 connector cables (4-, 5-,

or 8-pin).

Safety Control Module Requirements

Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor

outputs. See page 320 for the SCHMERSAL safety